media composer and film composer effects guideresources.avid.com/supportfiles/attach/effects.pdfv...

425
Avid ® Media Composer ® and Film Composer ® Effects Guide

Upload: others

Post on 11-Jul-2020

20 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

Avid

®

Media Composer

®

and Film Composer

®

Effects Guide

Page 2: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

ii

Contents

Chapter 1

Effects Editing

Displaying the Effect Palette

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Installing Third-Party Plug-In Effects

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Settings for Effects

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

User Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Effect Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Render Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Timeline View Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Trim Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Effect Types

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Real-Time Effects

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Playing Real-Time Effects

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Overlapping Real-Time Effects on the Same Track

. . . . . . . 27

Overlapping Real-Time Effects and Non-Real-Time Effects

28

Overlapping Real-Time Effects on Multiple Tracks

. . . . . . 28

Applying Effects to a Sequence

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Displaying Effect Icons

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Applying a Single Effect

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Applying Multiple Effects

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Selecting Multiple Transitions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Selecting Multiple Segments

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Selecting Multiple Layers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Applying a Third-Party Plug-In Effect

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Deleting Effects in a Sequence

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Page 3: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

iii

Working with Transition Effects

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Types of Transition Effects

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Applying a Dissolve Effect

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Using the Effect Palette

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Using the Transition Parameters

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Using the Add Dissolve Button

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Sizing the Effect to Fit the Media

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Trimming a Transition Effect

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Adjusting Transitions in the Timeline

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Customizing a Transition Effect

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Working in Effect Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Understanding the Effect Mode Window

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Effect Mode Buttons

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Selecting a New or Replacement Effect

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Selecting a Parameter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Changing a Parameter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Adjusting a Color Parameter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Adjusting the EffectÕs Position

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Adjusting the EffectÕs Size

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Cropping an Effect

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Accessing an EffectÕs Additional Parameters

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Reversing an EffectÕs Direction

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Changing the EffectÕs Display Quality

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Displaying the Safe Title/Action Guidelines

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Displaying the Aspect Ratio Grid for Film

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Choosing a Media Volume

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Using Key Frames

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Creating a Key Frame

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Selecting a Key Frame

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Adjusting the Level between Key Frames

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Adjusting the Acceleration

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Moving a Key Frame

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Changing a Key FrameÕs Parameters

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Page 4: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

iv

Copying and Pasting Key Frame Parameters

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Deleting a Key Frame

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Playing an Effect

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Rendering an Effect

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Selecting the Render Setting for a Project

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Combining Real Time Effects and Rendered Effects

. . . . . . . . . 65

Overlapping Real-Time Effects

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Overlapping Real-Time and Rendered Effects

. . . . . . . . . . 66

Speed Considerations

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Displaying Effects On-the-Fly

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Rendering a Single Effect

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Rendering Multiple Effects

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Rendering Third-Party Plug-in Effects

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Using an Effect Template

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Saving an Effect Template

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Applying an Effect Template

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Using Multilayer Effects

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Creating a Chroma or Luma Key Effect

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Creating a Matte Key Effect

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Working with Imported Graphics and Animation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Editing with Imported Matte Key Clips

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Editing with Imported Master Clips

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Nesting Effects

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Nesting a Title within a Picture-in-Picture

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Nesting a Split Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Another Nesting Technique

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Expanding Nested Effects in the Timeline

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Submaster Editing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Submaster Editing of Multiple Clips

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Submaster Editing of Multiple Effects

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Collapsing Layers into One Sub-master Effect

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Video Mixdown

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Managing Your Media Files

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Page 5: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

v

Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Chapter 2 Creating and Editing Titles and Graphic Objects

Task Overview Ñ Creating and Editing Titles

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Creating New Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Understanding the Title Tool Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Setting Up the Drawing Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Viewing Anti-Aliased Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Using Title and Action Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Using Safe Colors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Selecting a Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Displaying a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Snapping to Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Bringing the Title Tool Window to the Foreground . . . . . 101Understanding the Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Working with Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105The Text Formatting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Setting the Default Text Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Font Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Text JustiÞcation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Text Kerning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Leading Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Point Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Bold and Italics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Using the Drawing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Selecting Line Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Choosing Colors and Setting Transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Adjusting the Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Blending Two Colors in an Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Adjusting the Transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Working with Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Saving Text and Drawing Attributes as Title Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Managing Title Styles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Page 6: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

vi

Manipulating Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Basic Manipulation Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Grouping, Locking, and Layering Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Grouping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Locking and Unlocking Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Layering Text and Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Aligning Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Saving Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Saving New Titles and Titles You Open from a Bin . . . . . . . . 139Creating Additional Titles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Saving a Title in a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Exporting a Title as a PICT File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Exiting the Title Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Editing a Title into a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Editing an Existing Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Removing Titles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Fading a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Titles and Their Related Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Displaying the Aspect Ratio Grid for Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Changing Existing Titles to Real Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Restrictions of Real-Time Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Chapter 3 2D Effects Reference

Effect Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1592D Effect Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Border Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Color Effect Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Color Selection Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Crop Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Key Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Matrix Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Motion Effect Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Position and Size Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Page 7: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

vii

Position and Size Parameters for Blowup Effects. . . . . . . . . . . 169Rate Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Reverse Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Transition Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Blend Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Dip To Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Dissolve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Fade From Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Fade To Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Picture-In-Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Superimpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Conceal Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Bottom Left to Top Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Bottom Right to Top Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Bottom to Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Left to Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Right to Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Top Left to Bottom Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Top Right to Bottom Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Top to Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Film Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1901:1.66 Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1911:1.85 Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1921:2.35 Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19316 x 9 Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Blowup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Film Dissolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Film Fade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Image Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Color Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Luminance (Luma Adjust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Chrominance (Chroma). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Page 8: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

viii

Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Color Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Flip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Flip Flop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Flop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Resize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Sub-master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Key Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212YUV Chroma Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Controlling Key and Spill Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Real-Time and Non-Real-Time Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Luma Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Matte Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

L-Conceal Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Bottom Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Bottom Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Top Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Top Right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Motion Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Freeze Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Variable Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Strobe Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Peel Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Bottom Left Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Bottom Right Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Bottom to Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Left to Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Right to Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Top Left Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Top Right Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Top to Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Push Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Page 9: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

ix

Bottom Left to Top Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Bottom Right to Top Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Bottom to Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Left to Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Right to Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Top Left to Bottom Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Top Right to Bottom Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Top to Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Spin Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250X Spin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Y Spin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Z Spin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Squeeze Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Bottom Centered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Bottom Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Bottom Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Bottom to Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Centered Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Horizontal Centered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Left Centered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Left to Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Right Centered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Right to Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Top Centered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Top Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Top Right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Top to Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Vertical Centered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Box Wipes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Bottom Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Left Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Lower Left Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Lower Right Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Page 10: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

x

Right Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Top Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Upper Left Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Upper Right Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Edge Wipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Horizontal Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Lower Left Diagonal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Lower Right Diagonal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Upper Left Diagonal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Upper Right Diagonal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Vertical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Vertical Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Matrix Wipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Block Spiral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290One-Way Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Speckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Zig-Zag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Saw Tooth Wipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Horizontal Open Saw Tooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Horizontal Saw Tooth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Vertical Open Saw Tooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Vertical Saw Tooth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Shape Wipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Center Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Diamond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Four Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Horizontal Bands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Horizontal Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Page 11: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

xi

Vertical Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Comparison of Similar Effects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Box Wipe Ð Upper Left Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Conceal Ð Top Left to Bottom Right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Push Ð Top Left to Bottom Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Squeeze Ð Top Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Chapter 4 3D Effects Editing

Getting Familiar with the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Accessing the 3D Effects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Opening Parameter Panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Using the Enable Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Resetting Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Using Effect Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Effects with 2D and 3D Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Promoting 2D Effects to 3D Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Using Matte Keys with 3D Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Creating a 3D Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Turning the 3D Effects Option On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Acceleration and Level Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Level Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Acceleration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Setup Versus Key Frame Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Setup Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Key Frame Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Manipulating an Image Using Parameter Panes. . . . . . . . . . . . 322Manipulating an Image by Clicking and Dragging . . . . . . . . . 322Motion Path Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Zooming In or Out on the Effect Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Moving in 3D Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324The 3D Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Rotation Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

About 3D Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Page 12: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

xii

The Hierarchy of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Corner Pinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Crop Ñ Cropping the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Scaling Ñ Changing the Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Axis Ñ Moving the Center of Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Skew Ñ Tilting the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Rotate Ñ Rotating an Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Position Ñ Moving the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Spline Ñ Moving the Image Along a Smooth Path . . . . . . . . . 336

Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Difference Between Tension and Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . 338Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Adding a New Point to a Spline Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Perspective Ñ Moving the Perspective Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Target Ñ Post-Transformation Position and Scaling . . . . . . . . 341Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343Highlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Defocus Ñ Controlling the Sharpness of Focus . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Trail Ñ Adding a Trail to a Moving Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Foregnd Ñ Selecting Between Full, Chroma, and Luma Keys 348

Full Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Luma Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Chroma Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Background Ñ Add a Background Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3553D Effects Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Shape Parameter Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Page Turns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Page Turn Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Splashes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Limitations to Splashes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Page 13: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

xiii

Ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Limitations to Ball Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Offset Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Slats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370One Burst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Center Burst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371Saw Tooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Sine Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373Bumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Scaling Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374Hour Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Bow Tie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Octagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Hexagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Rain Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Hour Glass 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Hex Medium. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Hex Wide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Goblet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Chapter 5 Working with 3D Effects

Some Tips for Creating These Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384Applying a 3D Warp Effect as a Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386Creating a Page Turn Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

A Simple Variation on the Page Turn Transition . . . . . . . . . . . 390Creating A Splash Dissolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Creating a Scaled Picture-in-Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394Using the Spline Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Corner Pinning an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397Creating a Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Page 14: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

xiv

Using Axis for a Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Turning a Splash into a Flat Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403Applying a Chroma Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Appendix A Troubleshooting

No Title and Video Background Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407Wrong Title Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Index

Page 15: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

15

CHAPTER 1

Effects Editing

The Composer system offers many effects that you can apply to your sequences. You can also use third-party plug-in effects that are com-patible with Adobe Photoshopª. The effects that are available on your Composer system depend on the model and options that you pur-chased. For the list of effects available for your model, see the Avid Film Composer and Media Composer Reference Guide.

This chapter explains how to apply effects to transitions or segments (clips) in your sequence. After you have selected the effect and applied it to a transition or segment, you can adjust the effect parameters to meet your requirements.

Many effects are real time, which means you do not have to render them before you play them. You can preview effects that are not real time before rendering. Rendering an effect creates a media Þle that plays with the sequence.

After you create an effect, you can save it as an Effect template and reapply the template to other transitions or segments in your sequence. Some effects can be applied only to transitions, other effects can be applied only to segments, and some effects can be applied to both transitions and segments. In addition, some effects can be applied to a single video layer, and others to multiple video layers.

Page 16: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

16

For an explanation of particular effects and the effect parameters, see Chapter 3, Ò2D Effects ReferenceÓ and Chapter 4, Ò3D Effects EditingÓ

Displaying the Effect Palette

You select most effects from the Effect Palette in the Tools menu. The exceptions are Motion effects that are accessed from the Fast menu above the Source monitor, the Freeze Frame effect that is accessed from the Clip menu, and titles that are created with the Title tool.

The effects available through the Effect palette are grouped by effect category:

¥ Blend

¥ Box Wipe

¥ Conceal

¥ Edge Wipe

¥ Film

¥ Image

¥ Key

¥ L-Conceal

¥ Matrix Wipe

¥ Peel

¥ Push

¥ Sawtooth Wipe

¥ Shape Wipe

¥ Spin

¥ Squeeze

Page 17: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

17

Each of these effect categories contains multiple effects. Use the fol-lowing procedure to display the Effect palette.

To display the Effect palette

1. Either choose Effect Palette from the Tools menu, press k-8, or click the Effect palette button in Effect mode.

2. The palette for the Þrst effect category, Blend, appears:

Tools menu

Effect palette button

Scrollable list of effect categories

Blend effect choices

Page 18: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

18

The left side of the Effect palette displays a scrollable list of effect cate-gories. The right side shows the various effects that are available for the currently selected effect category.

3. Click an effect category to select it.

Note that the 3D Warp effect is only available on systems with the 3D option. For information on 3D Effects, see Chapter 4, Ò3D Effects Edit-ingÓ

Displaying Effect Templates

Effect templates allow you to save the parameters of an effect and use them again to create or modify other effects

In addition to allowing you to view all the standard effects, the Effect palette allows you to view and access effect templates that are stored in open bins. The names of open bins containing effects appear in a list below the effect categories. To view the effect templates in the bin, click the bin name. The list appears in the right side of the Effect pal-ette. For example, in the following illustration the bin named Effect Examples contains two effect templates named Quad Split Transition and Page Turn 45.

n In the above illustration, notice that the Composer system also displays other effect Þles such as real time titles and matte key clips.

Page 19: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

19

Whenever you open or close a bin or whenever you drop an effect into a bin, both lists automatically update.

Once a template appears in the right side of the Effect palette you can apply it like any other effect. See ÒUsing an Effect TemplateÓ on page 69 for more information.

Installing Third-Party Plug-In Effects

You can use third-party plug-in effects that are compatible with Adobe Photoshop Version 2.0.1. When third-party plug-in effects are installed on your Composer system, they appear in the Effect palette. You can apply them to your sequence as you would apply an Avid effect. You can set a third-party plug-in effectÕs parameters in Effect mode. You can view and render third-party plug-in effects using the same editing procedures as Avid effects.

To install third-party plug-In effects

1. Copy the plug-in Þles from the software vendorÕs folder to the Ò3rd Party Plug-InsÓ folder in the Supporting Files folder in your Composer folder. You must place the plug-ins directly in this folder. They cannot be inside another folder within this folder or elsewhere on your Composer system. If they are, the Composer system will not recognize them.

2. If the Composer application is open, you must close it and reopen it before the third-party plug-in effects will appear in the Effect palette.

The following is an example of how third-party plug-in effects appear in the Composer Effect palette.

Page 20: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

20

For information on applying third party effects, see the topic ÒApply-ing a Third-Party Plug-In EffectÓ on page 35.

Settings for Effects

The Composer system has settings that control how you use effects. Some of these settings are User settings and some are menu selections. This section describes the User settings. The menu selections are described in the topic ÒRendering an EffectÓ on page 65.

User Settings

There are four User settings that control how effects are used: Effect, Render, Timeline, and Trim. This section explains each of these set-tings. For information about other settings in the system, see the UserÕs Guide.

Effect Settings

There are two effect categories, Wipes and Keys, that contain effects that are mutually exclusive as real-time effects. If you have both effect categories in a sequence, only one can be real-time. The other must be

Third-party plug-in effects

Effect Palette

The Composersystem creates a new effect category for the plug-ins

Additional third party plug-in categories

Page 21: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

21

rendered. Use the Effect Settings dialog box to specify which effect cat-egory should be real time.

n Your Composer system must have an Advanced JPEG compression board to have real-time effects.

To change the Effect Settings

1. In the Project window, click the Settings button.

2. Double-click the Effects setting. The Effect Settings dialog box appears:

3. Select which effect category you want to be real time. The change takes place immediately in the Effect palette.

Understanding the Color Coding

The Effect Settings also control how effects are displayed in the Effect palette. You will notice in the Effect palette that:

¥ Real-time effects are preceded by an orange dot

¥ Real-time effects that may not be playable in real time are pre-ceded by a green dot

¥ Non-real-time effects have no dot

Page 22: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

22

The reason a real-time effect may not be playable in real time is because of the projectÕs Effect Setting, because a real-time transition effect has been applied on top of another effect, or because there is more than one real-time overlapping effect.

For more information on real-time effects, see the topic ÒReal-Time EffectsÓ on page 26.

Render Settings

You can control the size of an imported graphic and a rendered effect to Þt within a playable range by changing the Render settings. This setting is intended to prevent playback pauses caused by PICT images, Quicktime Þles, or rendered composites that are too complex.

Orange dot indicates a real-time effect

Green dot indicates areal-time effect that maynot be playable in real time

No dot (as in Matte Key above) indicates a non-real-time effect;in the Timeline and in the Effect mode window, the effect icon contains a blue dot until the effect is rendered

Page 23: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

23

To change the Render settings

1. In the Project window, click the Settings button.

2. Double-click the Render setting. The Render Settings dialog box appears:

3. Enter the following parameters:

- Limit rendered frame size to n% of default limit Ð this is a per-cent of the AVRÕs default limit. The effectÕs AVR is the same as the sequenceÕs AVR. Enter a percent. The default is 100%.

If frame size exceeds the threshold Ð the threshold is estab-lished by the above percent. Select an action. The default is ÒAsk me.Ó

If you select ÒAsk me,Ó and the threshold is exceeded during rendering, the following dialog box appears:

If you select ÒDonÕt SoftenÓ you may get an error message, such as a video underrun, when you play the rendered Þle.

If you do not respond within 30 seconds, the system automati-cally selects Soften.

Page 24: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

24

Timeline View Settings

All effect icons are displayed in the Timeline by default. You can change the Timeline settings to display all effect icons, all effect icons except Dissolve icons, or no effect icons. The fewer effect icons you display, the faster the screen refreshes.

To change the Timeline Settings

1. Click the Fast menu button in the Timeline window.

The Timeline settings pop-up menu appears:

2. To display all effect icons in the Timeline, choose Effect Icons.

3. To display all effect icons except Dissolve icons, choose Effect Icons and deselect Dissolve Icons.

4. To display no effects icons, deselect Effect Icons. Dissolve Icons is automatically dimmed.

5. To save your Timeline settings, click the Timeline View Name but-ton, select Save As, and enter a view name.

Page 25: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

25

Trim Settings

When you are in Trim mode, you can control whether or not the effects you apply are computed immediately on the screen (that is, on-the-ßy) or rendered later when you select the Render Effect function. This set-ting is deÞned in the Trim Settings dialog box.

To change the Trim Settings

1. In the Project window, click the Settings button.

2. Double-click the Trim setting. The Trim Settings dialog box appears:

Timeline View Name button

Use the Render On-The-Fly selection to determine when the Composersystem computes effects

Page 26: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

26

Effect Types

There are two primary effect types that are deÞned by where you use them in a sequence:

¥ Transition effects

¥ Segment effects (single-layer and multilayer)

A transition effect, such as a Dissolve effect, is applied at the cut point of two video clips that are on the same video track (that is, the same video layer).

A segment effect is applied to an entire clip or a group of clips. There are two types of segment effects:

¥ A single-layer segment effect, such as a Mask, is applied to a seg-ment on one video track. Single-layer segment effects use one stream of video.

¥ A multilayer segment effect, such as a Picture-In-Picture effect, is applied to the top layer of segments that contain two or more video tracks that will be played simultaneously.

Effects can also be nested within other effects. Instead of one video layer being physically above another video layer, a nested effect is con-tained within another effect on the same video layer. For more informa-tion about nested effects, see ÒNesting EffectsÓ on page 78.

All of the Avid effects and their effect types are listed in the Avid Film Composer and Media Composer Reference Guide.

Real-Time Effects

A real-time effect is an effect that you can apply to a sequence and play without having to render it Þrst (rendering takes time and disk space). A real-time effect has a small orange dot within the effect icon in the

Page 27: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

27

Timeline. Effects that must be rendered have a small green or blue dot within the effect icon in the Timeline. For more information, see ÒUnderstanding the Color CodingÓ on page 21.

n Because real-time effects require an Advanced JPEG compression board and on some systems a DVE daughter board, not all Composer systems have real-time effects. For an list of the Composer systems on which there are real-time effects, see the Avid Film Composer and Media Composer Reference Guide.

Playing Real-Time Effects

Although you can create a sequence that has any number of real-time and non-real-time effects, the Composer system can play only one real-time effect at a time. The following sections explain how the Com-poser system handles situations with overlapping real-time effects. In any case, if you want to play two overlapping effects, you must render one of the effects.

n If you have a real-time Title and a real-time Dissolve effect, render the Dis-solve effect because it takes less time.

Overlapping Real-Time Effects on the Same Track

If your sequence contains overlapping real-time effects on the same video track, only one effect can be played in real time. For example, if you have two real-time effects on the same track (e.g., a Dissolve over-laps video with a Mask effect), the Composer system will play the real-time Mask effect and not the real-time Dissolve.

Page 28: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

28

Overlapping Real-Time Effects and Non-Real-Time Effects

The combination of real-time and non-real-time effects on the same video track can show different results, depending on when you render the non-real-time effects.

¥ If you render the non-real-time segment effects after you apply the real-time transition effect, the sequence will play correctly.

¥ If you render the non-real-time segment effects before you apply the real-time transition effect, the sequence will not play correctly.

Overlapping Real-Time Effects on Multiple Tracks

If your sequence contains overlapping real-time effects on multiple video tracks, only the effect on the highest numbered track can be played in real time. For example, if you have a real-time Superimpose segment effect on track V2 over a real-time Edge Wipe transition effect

Real-timeDissolve transition effect

Real-timeMask segment effect

Non-real-timeMatrix Wipe segment effect

Real-timeEdge Wipe transition effect

Page 29: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

29

on track V1, the system plays the Superimpose effect in real time and plays the Edge Wipe effect as a cut.

In this example, to play both effects you must render the Edge Wipe effect.

Applying Effects to a Sequence

This section explains how to apply an effect to a sequence in the Record monitor. You can apply an effect:

¥ To one transition or segment on a single video layer

¥ To multiple transitions or segments on a single video layer

¥ To multiple transitions or segments on multiple video layers

The effect type (transition or segment) determines where you can place the effect in the sequence. For an explanation of the effect types, see the topic ÒEffect TypesÓ on page 26.

After you apply an effect, the next step is to adjust the effectÕs parame-ters. To understand how to adjust the effect parameters, see the topic ÒWorking in Effect ModeÓ on page 45.

Real-timeSuperimpose segment effect

Real-timeEdge Wipe transition effect

Page 30: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

30

Displaying Effect Icons

The default setting in the Timeline menu is to always display effect icons in the Timeline. If you have changed the setting, you have to reset it before you begin applying effects. For more information, see the topic ÒTimeline View SettingsÓ on page 24.

Applying a Single Effect

Use the following procedures to apply an effect to one transition or segment on a single video layer.

To apply a single effect

1. Create a sequence in the Record monitor using the standard Com-poser editing procedures. For information about editing a sequence, refer to the UserÕs Guide.

2. Choose Effect Palette from the Tools menu.

For an explanation of the Effect palette, see the topic ÒDisplaying the Effect PaletteÓ on page 16.

3. To apply an effect, do one of the following:

¥ Click and drag the desired effect to the segment or transition in the Timeline, and release the mouse button.

¥ Use the Segment mode button to highlight the segment in the Timeline where you want to apply the effect and double-click the effectÕs icon in the Effect palette.

The effect icon appears in the Timeline as shown in the following example.

Page 31: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

31

n While applying an effect, if the effect is a segment effect, one segment at a time is highlighted as you drag the effect within the Timeline. If the effect is a tran-sition effect, one transition at a time is highlighted as you drag the effect within the Timeline. Some effects can be both a transition and a segment effect, in which case transitions and segments are highlighted in the Timeline.

Applying Multiple Effects

You can apply an effect to multiple transitions, segments, or video lay-ers in a single step. First, select the sections in the sequence using a lasso and then apply the effect. The speciÞc procedures are explained below.

Selecting Multiple Transitions

To select multiple transitions:

1. Click the Effect mode button to enter Effect mode.

Effect Palette

Timeline

Page 32: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

32

2. Move the cursor above the rightmost transition in the Timeline that you want to select. Click and drag the cursor to the left and down to activate a selection box.

3. Continue to drag the selection box to the left until you lasso the leftmost transition that you want to select.

4. Release the mouse button when you have lassoed all the desired transitions.

The transitions that you selected are highlighted; and the Position indicator moves to the Þrst transition.

If the desired transitions are not contiguous, Shift-click a transition to deselect it.

5. Open the Effect palette and double-click the effectÕs icon that you want to apply the transitions to Ð in this example, the Fade From Color effect icon.

Cursor selection boxEffect mode Timeline

Two transitions are lassoed

Page 33: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

33

The effect is applied to the highlighted transitions in the Timeline.

If there is not enough incoming or outgoing media to apply the transi-tion effect, a dialog box appears. For more information, see the topic ÒSizing the Effect to Fit the MediaÓ on page 42.

Selecting Multiple Segments

To select multiple segments in the same video layer:

1. In Source/Record mode or Effect mode, move the cursor above the leftmost transition in the Timeline that you want to select. Click and drag the cursor to the right and down to activate a selection box.

Cursor selection box

Page 34: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

34

2. Continue to drag the selection box to the right until you lasso the rightmost segment that you want to select.

3. Release the mouse button when you have lassoed all the desired segments. The segments that you selected are highlighted.

n If the desired segments are not contiguous, Shift-click a segment to deselect it.

4. Open the Effect palette and double-click the effectÕs icon that you want to apply to the segments Ñ in this example, the Mask effect icon.

n To nest all clips inside one effect, Option-double-click the effect icon in the Effect palette.

Three segments are lassoed

Page 35: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

35

The effect is applied to the highlighted segments in the Timeline.

Selecting Multiple Layers

You can select transitions or segments on multiple layers using the same procedures described in the topics ÒSelecting Multiple Transi-tionsÓ on page 31 and ÒSelecting Multiple SegmentsÓ on page 33.

Applying a Third-Party Plug-In Effect

Third-party plug-in effects are applied to a sequence using procedures that are similar to those used for an Avid effect. The only difference is that parameters for third-party plug-in effects appear automatically in dialog boxes when you apply the effect to the sequence.

n When a segment contains a third-party plug-in effect, the effectÕs parameters dialog box displays the Þrst time you move the Position indicator to another frame in that segment.

To apply plug-in effects to your sequence

1. Drag the effectÕs icon from the Effect palette to a clip in the Time-line.

If applicable, a parameters dialog box appears.

2. Select the pertinent effect parameters.

3. Render the effect.

Page 36: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

36

To change parameters for third-party plug-in effects

1. In the Timeline, move the blue Position indicator to the effect and click the Effect mode button.

2. To display the effectÕs parameters dialog box, either click the Other Options button in the Effect mode window or double-click the effect icon in the Effect palette.

3. Change the effectÕs parameters. Some effects allow you to set the Foreground and Background colors using the parameters in the Effect mode window.

4. Render the effect.

Deleting Effects in a Sequence

Transition effects can be deleted from a sequence in Source/Record mode, Trim mode, or Effect mode. Segment effects can be deleted in Source/Record mode or Effect mode. Use the following procedures to either delete a single effect from a sequence or delete effects in multi-ple segments.

To delete a single effect

1. Place the blue Position indicator on the effectÕs icon in the Time-line.

In this example, the segment effect for the Þrst clip on video track V1 is being deleted.

Page 37: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

37

2. If there are multiple tracks that contain effects at the same position in the Timeline, select only the track where the effect to be deleted resides.

In this example, only video track V1 is selected, because the Title effect on video track V2 should not be deleted.

n If you are deleting a segment effect and the segment contains a transition effect (as shown in the example), the transition effect will be deleted also, because the transition effect resides Òon top ofÓ the segment effect. If neces-sary, you will have to reapply the transition effect.

3. In Source/Record mode, click the Remove Effect button located on the Fast menu above the Record monitor or in the second row of buttons below the Record monitor.

In Trim mode Ñ for transition effects only Ñ either press the Delete key or click the Remove Effect button.

In Effect mode, press the Delete key.

n When you delete an effect from a sequence, the associated media Þle is NOT deleted. In order to delete the effectÕs media Þle you must manually remove it from the drive. The system operates this way so that you will be able to undo the deletion of an effect or undo the change you made to an effect. To delete an effectÕs media Þle, see the topic ÒManaging Your Media FilesÓ on page 91.

Record monitor track selector

Page 38: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

38

To delete multiple segment effects

1. Click the Segment mode button in the Timeline and Shift-click each segment to be deleted.

2. In Source/Record mode, click the Remove Effect button.

In Effect mode, press the Delete key.

Working with Transition Effects

You apply a transition effect to the cut point between two clips on the same video track. After you apply a transition effect, you can adjust its relative position and duration. Depending on the speciÞc effect, other effect parameters may apply.

Types of Transition Effects

Transition effects are included in all effect categories on the Effect pal-ette, except the Image effect category.

For an explanation of the transition effects in each effect category, see Chapter 3, Ò2D Effects Reference,Ó and Chapter 4 Ò3D Effects Editing.Ó

Applying a Dissolve Effect

One of the most common transition effects is a Dissolve. The Com-poser system has three methods you can use to apply a Dissolve effect:

¥ Select the Dissolve effect from the Effect palette.

¥ Type a duration in the Transition parameters.

¥ Click the Add Dissolve button.

This section describes each of these methods.

Page 39: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

39

Using the Effect Palette

Use the following procedure to apply a Dissolve effect to a transition using the Effect palette.

To apply a Dissolve effect using the Effect Palette

1. Create a sequence in the Record monitor using the standard Com-poser editing procedures. For information about editing a sequence, refer to the UserÕs Guide.

2. Choose Effect Palette from the Tools menu or press k-8.

3. In the Blend palette, drag the Dissolve effect icon to the transition in the Timeline and release the mouse button.

The Dissolve effect icon appears in the Timeline.

When there is not enough incoming or outgoing media to apply a tran-sition effect, a dialog box appears. See the topic ÒSizing the Effect to Fit the MediaÓ on page 42.

Using the Transition Parameters

You can create a Dissolve effect using the Transition parameters dis-played in Trim mode and Effect mode. Simply enter the duration for which the effect will play, and the system adds the Dissolve to the sequence.

To create a Dissolve using the Transition Parameters

1. In Trim mode or Effect mode, click a transition in the Timeline.

2. In the transition Duration parameter, enter the DissolveÕs dura-tion. The Duration format is determined by the Duration setting above the Record monitor, for example seconds:frames.

Page 40: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

40

This adds the Dissolve effect at the transition, and a Dissolve effect icon appears in the Timeline.

3. Click the Relative Position menu button and from the pop-up menu select the effectÕs position relative to the cut point.

For an explanation of the Relative Position menu selections, see the topic ÒTransition ParametersÓ on page 172.

Using the Add Dissolve Button

Another way to create a transition effect is to click the Add Dissolve button. This button allows you to apply a Dissolve or any other transi-tion effect listed below without having to access the Effect palette:

¥ Dissolve

¥ Film Dissolve

¥ Film Fade

¥ Fade To Color

¥ Fade From Color

¥ Dip To Color

To create an effect using the Add Dissolve button

1. In Source/Record mode or Trim mode, move the Position indica-tor to the transition in the Timeline.

2. Click the Add Dissolve button located either below the Record monitor, in the monitor Fast menu, or in the Command palette.

The Add Dissolve dialog box appears:

Relative Positionmenu button

Relative Positionpop-up menu

Duration

Page 41: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

41

3. Click the Add Dissolve parameter and choose a transition effect from the pop-up menu.

For an explanation of individual effects, see Chapters 4 and 5.

4. Enter the Duration of the transition effect in frames.

5. Click the Position parameter and from the pop-up menu choose the effectÕs relative position to the cut point.

Page 42: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

42

6. If you select Custom Start, in the Starts parameter you must enter the number of frames before the cut to start the effect.

7. Click Target Disk and from the pop-menu choose a disk on which to store the effect.

The Effect Source Disk is the disk where the media on the outgoing shot of a transition resides.

8. If the effect you selected is real time on your Composer system, select the DonÕt Render Real-time Effects parameter to prevent real-time effects from being rendered.

9. To add the effect without rendering it, click the Add button.

Or, to add the effect and render it, click the Add and Render but-ton.

This adds the selected effect to the transition in the sequence.

Sizing the Effect to Fit the Media

When you select a transition effect from the Effect palette and there is not enough source media to apply the effect, such as a Dissolve, the following message appears:

Page 43: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

43

¥ Off Media A Ð refers to the number of frames by which the outgo-ing media is short.

¥ Off Media B Ð refers to the number of frames by which the incom-ing media is short.

To automatically size the effect to fit the media

¥ Click the Size to Fit button in the dialog box.

The system sets the duration of the effect to Þt the available media; if you have selected a relative position, the system attempts to preserve it.

To change the relative position or duration of the transition effect, see the topic ÒUsing the Transition ParametersÓ on page 39.

Trimming a Transition Effect

You can trim a transition effect using the standard transition trim pro-cedures or the Transition Corner Display function in Trim mode. For more information, refer to the UserÕs Guide.

Page 44: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

44

Adjusting Transitions in the Timeline

You can change the duration of dissolve effects just by dragging them in the timeline. You must be in Transitions Corner Display in Trim mode to use this feature.

To adjust a transition using the Transition Corner Display:

1. Click on the transition in the Timeline.

2. Enter Trim mode

3. Click the Transition Corner Display button.

The button turns bright green, and the display is enabled. As you position the cursor over the transition, it changes to look like a Þlm clip that has been cut for a splice.

4. Lengthen or shorten the transition effect by clicking and dragging to the desired length.

- To shorten a transition, drag toward the transition point

- To lengthen a transition, drag away from the transition point

The cursor changes to a hand that moves as you drag. You can adjust both the outgoing and the incoming video.

5. To review your edit, click the Transition Play Loop button.

Customizing a Transition Effect

To customize a transition effect, such as changing the fade color, see the topic ÒWorking in Effect ModeÓ on page 45.

Page 45: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

45

Working in Effect Mode

After you have created an effect and applied it to a transition or seg-ment in your sequence, you can adjust its appearance and operation by changing its effect parameters in Effect mode. This section explains how to go to Effect mode and use the Effect mode window, and how to adjust the most common effect parameters.

Not all effect parameters apply to all effects. Parameters that do not apply to an effect are disabled in the Effect mode window. To deter-mine which parameters pertain to an effect, refer to the effectÕs description in Chapter 3, Ò2D Effects ReferenceÓ and Chapter 4, Ò3D Effects EditingÓ.

Understanding the Effect Mode Window

Use the following procedures to enter Effect mode and display the Effect mode window.

1. Place the blue Position indicator on the effectÕs icon in the Time-line.

2. Click the Effect mode button.

The Effect mode window appears:

Page 46: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

46

Effect Mode Buttons

This section describes the buttons in the Effect mode window, starting from the top-left button in the window. Not all buttons apply to each effect. If a button is not applicable, it does not appear in the Effect mode window for that effect. For more information about using each of the buttons, refer to the associated topic in this chapter.

¥ Other Options Ð Use this button to access additional parameters for matrix effects, third-party plug-in effects, and the Title tool.

Effect Preview monitor

Effect ModeWindow

Effect Icon and Effect Name

Effect parameters

Key Frameparameters

Slider used to adjust parameter

Key Frame indicator in the effect’s Timeline

Position indicator’s loca-tion with the effect shown in seconds and frames

Effect’s duration shown in seconds and frames

Other Optionsbutton

Page 47: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

47

¥ Display Quality Ð Use this button to switch the quality of the video image displayed in the Effect Preview monitor from draft quality to best quality. This button only pertains to resized effects and Peel and Squeeze effects.

¥ Reverse Effect Ð Use this button to reverse the operation of an effect. When the arrow points to the right, the effect plays nor-mally. When the arrow points to the left, the effect is reversed. This button is similar to changing the direction of a switcherÕs T-bar. For Key effects, this button inverts the key.

¥ Effect palette Ð Use this button to display or hide the Effect palette.

¥ Safe Title/Action Ð Use this button to display guidelines in the Effect Preview monitor.

¥ Create Key Frame Ð Use this button to create a key frame at the frame in the effectÕs Timeline where you place the Position indica-tor.

You can also use the Add Key Frame button on the Command Pal-ette to add key frames. (You can access the Command Palette from the Tools menu.) The Add Key Frame button on the Command

ReverseEffect

Display Quality

Safe Title/Action

Effect Palette

Play Effect Outline

CreateKey Frame

Delete Key Frame

Play Effect Preview

Render Effect

Media Volume

Play Effect Preview and Loop

Page 48: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

48

Palette is mapped to the double quote key (Ò) on the keyboard. You can map it to another key or you can map it to an existing but-ton in the Source/Record Monitor.

When you are in Source/Record Mode, you can also use the Add Key Frame button to add audio break points. See the sections in the UserÕs Guide ÒWorking with Audio Òand ÒMapping User-Selectable ButtonsÓ for information on adding audio breakpoints and mapping buttons respectively.

¥ Delete Key Frame Ð Use this button to delete a highlighted (pink) key frame in the effectÕs Timeline.

¥ Media Volume Ð Use this button to select a disk drive on which to store the effectÕs media Þle when rendering.

¥ Render Effect Ð Use this button to render the current effect.

¥ Play Effect Outline Ð Use this button to play an outline of the effect from the current position.

¥ Play Effect Preview and Loop Ð Use this button to play a continu-ous loop for previewing the effect.

¥ Play Effect Preview Ð Use this button to play an approximation of the effect from the current position. The system computes the effect as fast as it can.

¥ 3D Promotion Ð This button appears when you use a 2D effect on systems with the 3D Effects option installed. You can click the but-ton to promote the effect to a 3D effect. For example, you can pro-mote a 2D picture-in-picture effect to a 3D effect and make use of the 3D effects parameters. Before you promote the effect to 3D you may want to save a 2D copy as a template so you can go back to it again at a later time. For more information see ÒPromoting 2D Effects to 3D EffectsÓ on page 315.

Page 49: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

49

¥ Source/Record mode Ð Use this button to go to Source/Record mode.

¥ Trim mode Ð Use this button to go to Trim mode.

¥ Effect mode Ð This button is highlighted, to indicate that you are in Effect mode.

¥ Relative Position Ð Use this button to select the relative position of the transition effect from the cut point.

¥ Duration Ð Use this parameter to enter the duration of the transi-tion effect.

For an detailed explanation of the above two parameters, see the topic ÒUsing the Transition ParametersÓ on page 39.

Selecting a New or Replacement Effect

While in Effect mode, you can apply a new effect to the current sequence, or you can replace an existing effect.

To add a new or replacement effect

1. Either click the Effect Palette button at the top of the Effect mode window, choose Effect Palette from the Tools menu, or press k-8.

2. Choose an effect category.

3. Use one of the following methods to add the effect:

Effect ModeSource/Record Mode

Trim Mode

DurationRelative Position

(Displayed only for Transition effects)

Page 50: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

50

- Drag the new effectÕs icon to the Timeline. To replace an exist-ing effect, place the new effectÕs icon on top of the existing effectÕs icon.

- Drag the new effectÕs icon to the Effect Preview window.

- Highlight the effect in the Timeline and double-click the effectÕs icon.

4. Set the applicable effect parameters in the Effect mode window.

Selecting a Parameter

Some effects have additional parameters that you select from the cur-rent parameterÕs Fast menu. For example, Border Color, Border Blend, and Background Color are on the same Fast menu.

Changing a Parameter

To change a parameter that has a slider, you must click its slider. When a slider is activated, it turns pink. Use the Tab key to move from one slider to the next slider.

Use any of the following methods to change the value of a parameter that has a slider.

Fast Menu button

Pop-up menu showing other parameters

Parameter’s slider

Parameter’s numeric value

Page 51: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

51

¥ Move the slider with the mouse.

¥ Type a new value using the numeric keypad and, if you entered less than 3 digits, press Enter.

¥ Use the Left and Right Arrow keys to change the value by -1 or +1.

¥ Press the Shift key and use the Left and Right Arrow keys to change the value by -10 or +10.

Adjusting a Color Parameter

You can change a color parameter or select a key color using the eye-dropper instead of the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance sliders.

To select a color using the Eyedropper

1. Move the mouse to the Color Preview window to activate the Eye-dropper.

2. Click and drag the Eyedropper into the Effect Preview monitor and release the mouse button on the color you want to select from the video image.

The parameterÕs numeric values are updated, and the selected color appears in the Color Preview window.

Adjusting the Effect’s Position

The Position sliders represent the position of the effect center along both the X axis (Horizontal Position) and Y axis (Vertical Position) at a key frame. If the effect center is positioned at H Pos = 0 and V Pos = 0, the effect is centered in the frame.

Eyedropper over the Color Preview window

Page 52: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

52

On the X axis, an H Pos value of -999 places the center of the effect at the extreme left of the frame, and a value of 999 places it at the extreme right.

On the Y axis, a V Pos value of -999 places the center of the effect at the extreme top of the frame, and a value of 999 places it at the extreme bottom of the frame.

As you move the sliders, you can see the frame outline moving in the Effect Preview monitor.

In addition to the standard procedures explained in the topic ÒChang-ing a ParameterÓ on page 50, you can adjust the Position parameters as follows:

¥ Click and drag on the effectÕs outline in the Effect Preview moni-tor. As you move the effect, the H Pos and V Pos sliders move.

Position parameters

Position sliders

Click and drag the effect

Page 53: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

53

For 3D Effects, see ÒPosition Ñ Moving the ImageÓ on page 334 and ÒMoving in 3D SpaceÓ on page 324.

Adjusting the Effect’s Size

For effects that use the Width and Height parameters, you can choose to control the size of the effect at key frames using a Þxed aspect ratio. When you enable the Fixed Aspect parameter, the Size parameter replaces the Width and Height parameters.

The range of values for the Size slider is 0 to 400. A Size of 100 means you have not scaled the effect so it is 1 time its original size. A Size of 400 means the effect is 4 times its original size.

You can adjust the Size parameter using the standard procedures explained in the topic ÒChanging a ParameterÓ on page 50.

For 3D Effects, refer to the Scaling and Target parameters in Chapter 5.

Cropping an Effect

The Crop parameter allows you to remove video from the top, bottom, left, and right edges of the video. This parameter only applies to the following real-time effects: Picture-In-Picture, Resize, Chroma Key, and Luma Key.

Size parameter

Fixed Aspect is enabled

Page 54: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

54

To access the Crop parameter

¥ Click the Fast menu next to the Picture parameter and choose Crop from the pop-up menu.

The Crop parameter replaces the Picture parameter.

You can adjust the Crop parameter using the standard procedures explained in the topic ÒChanging a ParameterÓ on page 50.

For 3D Effects, refer to ÒCrop Ñ Cropping the ImageÓ on page 330.

Accessing an Effect’s Additional Parameters

Some effects have additional parameters that control their operation. For example, the Grid effect has additional parameters in which you set the number of columns and rows in the grid. When an effect has additional parameters, the Other Options button appears next to the effect name in the Effect mode window.

Page 55: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

55

To access an effect’s additional parameters

¥ Click the Other Options button next to the effect name.

A dialog box appears in which you set the additional parameters.

n You also use the Other Options button to access the parameters for third-party plug-in effects and the Title tool.

Reversing an Effect’s Direction

You can set many of the effects in the Effect palette to operate in reverse. When you operate the effect in reverse, the incoming (B) video changes places with the outgoing (A) video. The reversal only changes the positions of the A and B video for the duration of the effect.

To reverse an effect’s direction

¥ Click the Reverse Effect button at the top of the Effect mode win-dow.

When the right arrow is selected, the effect operates normally; when the left arrow is selected the effect operates in reverse.

Changing the Effect’s Display Quality

You can set effects in the Effect palette to display in either best quality or draft quality in the Effect Preview monitor. In best quality, the image is made as smooth as possible (based on the properties of the effect). The advantage of using draft quality is that the effect takes less time to preview and to render. Whichever quality you select, it has no affect on the effect or the information produced in the EDL. This fea-ture only pertains to resized effects and Peel and Squeeze effects.

Page 56: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

56

To change an effect’s display quality

¥ Click the Display Quality button at the top of the Effect mode win-dow.

When steps are selected, draft is the display quality.

Displaying the Safe Title/Action Guidelines

Many effects can utilize the outer edges of the viewing screen area. If you are editing material that will be viewed on screens with more lim-ited viewing areas, such as standard televisions, you can use the Safe Title/Action option to provide visual guidelines in the Effect Preview monitor that replicate the actual viewable area on a standard televi-sion screen.

For example, you can use the Safe Titles option as a template for the area in which you want the effect to operate. In this way, you can avoid the appearance of the effect ßoating off into a nonviewable area of a standard television screen.

To display the Safe/Title Action guidelines

¥ Click the Safe/Title Action button at the top of the Effect mode window.

Two outlined boxes appear in the Effect Preview monitor. The inner box is the Safe Title area. All text and objects should remain within the inner box. The outer box is the Safe Action area for video display.

Page 57: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

57

Displaying the Aspect Ratio Grid for Film

The Aspect Ratio Grid displays several guidelines to show you where you could crop the top or bottom of your frame to achieve the Òletter-boxÓ effect. The guidelines represent the standard mask ratios of pro-jected Þlm: 1.66, 16x9, 1.85, and 2.35. Use this feature to determine if an undesired element can be seen during screening, if an alternate take should be used, or if a resize is required.

You can display the Aspect Ratio Grid in Effect mode or in Source/Record mode.

To actually apply a mask, you select one of the Film masks from the Effect palette. For more information about applying effects, see the topic ÒReal-Time EffectsÓ on page 26.

To display the Aspect Ratio Grid in Effect mode

¥ With an image in the Effect Preview monitor, hold the Option key and click the Save Title/Action button above the Key Frames parameters.

Safe Title area

Safe Action area

Effect Preview Monitor

Page 58: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

58

Choosing a Media Volume

The Composer system allows you to choose the disk drive (media vol-ume) where you want to store your effectÕs media Þles.

To choose a media volume

1. Click the Media Volume button at the top of the Effect mode win-dow.

A dialog box appears.

2. Choose the volume (disk drive) from the pop-up menu and click OK.

After you have selected a drive with the Media Volume button, the Composer system continues to store effects to that volume (disk drive) until that volume is changed by:

¥ Clicking the Media Volume button again

¥ Aborting a disk render

¥ Receiving an error during a rendering operation

1.66

16x9

1.85

2.35

2.35

1.85

16x91.66

Film Mask aspect ratios

Effect Preview Monitor

Page 59: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

59

Using Key Frames

A key frame is a point in the effectÕs Timeline at which you can set parameters. Key frame indicators appear as triangles in the effectÕs Timeline below the Effect Preview monitor.

By default, the Composer system always provides the starting and ending key frames of an effect. Depending on the Composer model and options you purchased, you may be able to create additional key frames for each effect. Refer to Appendix A, ÒList of Effects for Avid Models,Ó for the number of key frames supported on your system.

Regardless of the number of key frames in your effect, you can use dif-ferent parameter settings for each key frame.

Creating a Key Frame

You can create a key frame at any point in the effectÕs Timeline.

Starting key frame Ending key frame

Page 60: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

60

To create a key frame

1. Click the position in the effectÕs Timeline below the Effect Preview monitor where you want to add the key frame. The Position indi-cator moves to that frame.

2. Click the Create Key Frame button to add the key frame.

Selecting a Key Frame

You can select a key frame or multiple key frames using the following procedures. A key frame turns pink when selected.

¥ To select one key frame, click the key frame indicator in the effectÕs Timeline.

¥ To select multiple key frames, hold down the Shift key and click the desired key frame indicators in the effectÕs Timeline.

¥ To select all key frames in the effectÕs Timeline, press k-A, or k-click on one key frame.

n For a fast way to jump to the previous or next key frame you can map the Fast Forward and Rewind keys from the Command palette to your keyboard.

Adjusting the Level between Key Frames

Use the Level parameter, together with key frames, to set the relative amount of the effect to be displayed over time Ñ for example, to fade a Superimpose effect in or out. The Level parameter performs differ-ently depending on the effect.

For Blend and Key effects, the Level parameter represents the effectÕs opacity. A Level of 100 is 100% transparent, a Level of 50 is 50% trans-parent, and a Level of 0 is 100% transparent.

Page 61: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

61

For Wipes and all other transition effects (except Dissolves) the Level parameter represents the proportion of incoming frames to outgoing frames. A Level of 0 is 100% of outgoing, a Level of 50 is 50% of outgo-ing, and a Level of 100 is 0% of outgoing.

Dissolve effects are a special case, where the Level parameter repre-sents both the effectÕs opacity and the proportion of incoming to out-going frames.

To adjust the Level parameter

1. Click a key frame indicator in the effectÕs Timeline to select it.

2. Adjust the Level parameter using the standard procedures explained in the topic ÒChanging a ParameterÓ on page 50.

Adjusting the Acceleration

The Acceleration parameter allows you to adjust the ßuidity of the effect, by having the effect Òease inÓ and Òease outÓ of every key frame. The Acceleration parameter applies to the entire effect, not spe-ciÞc key frames. Some sample Acceleration settings are:

n The overall speed of an effect is determined by the duration of the effect, which is determined by the length of the clip in the sequence. If you want to slow down or speed up the movement of an effect, you will need to change the length of your sequence; or use add edits to limit the portion of the clip affected by the effect.

Setting Result

0 Linear acceleration

50 Slight Òease inÓ and Òease outÓ

100 Maximum Òease inÓ and Òease outÓ

Page 62: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

62

To adjust the Acceleration parameter, use the standard procedures explained in the topic ÒChanging a ParameterÓ on page 50.

A graphical representation of the effectÕs acceleration over time appears above the Acceleration slider. See the example at the begin-ning of the topic ÒUsing Key FramesÓ on page 59.

n Acceleration does not apply to 3D effects.

Moving a Key Frame

After you have created a key frame, you can move it to another posi-tion in the effectÕs Timeline.

To move a key frame

¥ Hold down the Option key and click and drag the key frame to its new position.

n The starting and ending key frames cannot be moved.

Changing a Key Frame’s Parameters

In addition to the Level and Acceleration, you can change the parame-ters for any key frame, including the starting and ending key frames.

To change a key frame’s parameters

1. Click the key frame indicator in the effectÕs Timeline to select it. The key frame indicator turns pink when selected.

2. Adjust any of the applicable parameters in the Effect mode win-dow.

Page 63: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

63

Copying and Pasting Key Frame Parameters

You can copy and paste parameters from one key frame and apply them to another key frame. You can also copy key frame parameters from one effect to another effect.

To copy and paste key frame parameters

1. Click one key frame indicator in the effectÕs Timeline whose parameters you want to copy.

2. Choose Copy from the Edit menu or press k-C.

3. To copy the parameters to one key frame, click the key frame. To copy the parameters to multiple frames, hold down the Shift key and click multiple frames. To copy the parameters to all key frames, press k-A.

4. Choose Paste from the Edit menu or press k-V.

The parameters that you copied from one key frame are pasted to the key frame, or frames, you selected.

n You can also use Cut and Paste from the Edit menu to delete and paste a key frame.

Deleting a Key Frame

You can delete any key frame you create. You cannot delete the start-ing and ending key frames that the Composer system creates.

To delete a key frame

1. Click the key frame indicator in the effectÕs Timeline. The key frame indicator turns pink when selected.

2. Either click the Delete Key Frame button or press the Delete key on the keyboard.

Page 64: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

64

Playing an Effect

You may want to play an effect or its outline to check its appearance and operation. An effectÕs outline is a wire-frame representation of the effect.

To play an effect’s outline

¥ Click the Play Effect Outline button.

The effectÕs outline plays from the current position. For non-real-time effects, the outline does not play in real time. For example, if an effect is three seconds long, the outline may take eight seconds to play. However, if an effect is real time, it is played in real time.

¥ To stop playing the effect outline, click the mouse button or press the Space bar.

To play a preview of the effect

¥ Click the Play Effect Preview or Play Effect Preview and Loop but-tons.

Play Effect Preview plays an approximation of the effect from the current position. Play Effect Preview and Loop plays a continuous loop for previewing the effect.

The system plays a non-real-time effect as fast as it can compute the image for each frame. To play the effect at its normal rate, you must render the effect Þrst. However, if an effect is real time, it is played in real time.

¥ To stop playing an effect preview, click the mouse button or press the Space bar.

Play Effect Preview and Loop

Play Effect Preview

Page 65: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

65

Rendering an Effect

You must render a non-real-time effect before it can be played. When an effect is rendered, the system stores the effect and its media Þle as a precomputed master clip (often referred to as a precompute). The sys-tem uses the precompute the next time to play the effect at its normal speed.

Selecting the Render Setting for a Project

You can control the size of a rendered effect to Þt within a playable range by changing the Render settings. For an explanation of the Ren-der settings, see the topic ÒRender SettingsÓ on page 22.

Combining Real Time Effects and Rendered Effects

The Composer system can only process two streams of video at one time. Therefore, when two or more real-time effects overlap, the Com-poser system can play only one of these effects in real time. The other effects will not be displayed.

Overlapping Real-Time Effects

The following deÞnes how the Composer system handles situations with overlapping real-time effects.

¥ In cases where two or more real-time effects overlap, the Com-poser system plays one of the effects in real time and substitutes video from Track V1 for the real-time effect that it cannot create. If the video on Track V1 is not readily available because it is also a real-time effect, then the Composer system substitutes black for the real-time effect that it cannot create.

¥ If real-time effects on different video tracks overlap, the Composer system plays the effect on the highest numbered track in real time.

Page 66: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

66

¥ If you have two real-time effects on the same track (for example, a Dissolve or Wipe overlaps video with Color effects), the Composer system plays the real-time transition effect using video without the segment effect, or using black, in some cases.

In summary, if you want to view the video with both effects, render one of the overlapping effects.

Overlapping Real-Time and Rendered Effects

In cases where you are rendering effects that will overlap real-time transition effects, place the real-time transition effects in the sequence before rendering the non-real-time effects. This ensures that you ren-der enough extra frames of video to create the real-time effect in real time.

The Composer system only renders this section of video if the real-time transition effect is present before you render the segment effect.

Speed Considerations

If you have multiple short clips with multiple real-time effects, you may exceed the capacity of the hardware to play these in real time, resulting in Video Underrun error messages. In this case, render some of the intermediate effects before playing the sequence.

Displaying Effects On-the-Fly

You can display the results of effects automatically as soon as you cre-ate them. Note that this can slow down your editing of the sequence.

¥ To display effects automatically, choose the Render On-The-Fly option in the Special menu.

For another method of setting the Render On-The-Fly option, see the topic ÒTrim SettingsÓ on page 25.

Page 67: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

67

Rendering a Single Effect

After you have adjusted an effectÕs parameters, you can render the effect.

To render a single effect

1. Place the blue Position indicator on the effect in the Timeline.

2. Click the Render Effect button.

In Effect mode the button is below the Level parameter or below the 3D parameter list. In Trim mode the button is below the Source monitor. In Source/Record mode the button is in the Fast menu. The button is also on the Command palette.

The Target Disk dialog box appears.

n To prevent this dialog box from displaying, hold down the Option key when you click the Render Effect button. The system will use the last disk selected.

To display the esti-mated render time, press the letter T on the keyboard. Press T again to clear the display.

3. Select a disk drive from the pop-up menu on which to store the rendered effect and click OK.

The Effect Source Disk is the disk where the media on the outgoing shot of a transition resides.

The effect is rendered, and a precompute master clip is stored on the disk drive you selected.

Page 68: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

68

Rendering Multiple Effects

When you have more than one effect to render, you can render them as a group.

n Save your sequence before you use this feature, because this is a long batch process during which you can leave the Composer system unattended.

To render multiple effects

1. Click the Track Selector in the Timeline for each track on which you have effects to be rendered.

2. Mark an IN before the start of the Þrst effect to be rendered in your sequence; mark an OUT after the last effect to be rendered.

3. Choose Render In/Out in the Clip menu.

A dialog box appears:

4. Select the effectsÕ quality. The default quality is Highest Quality. The effect quality only applies to effects that change the image size, such as Picture-In-Picture, Peel, and Squeeze.

Page 69: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

69

n Another way to speed up rendering is to use the Sub-master effect. See the topic ÒSubmaster EditingÓ on page 84.

5. If you do not want to render the real-time effects in the selected group of effects, select the parameter Skip Real-time Effects.

To display the esti-mated render time, press the letter T on the keyboard. Press T again to clear the display.

6. Click OK.

The Composer system renders all effects between the IN and OUT marks.

Rendering Third-Party Plug-in Effects

Third-party plug-in effects must be rendered. Use the same proce-dures explained in this section.

Using an Effect Template

The parameters for an effect are called the Effect template. You can reuse an Effect template in multiple places in a sequence by saving the template in a bin and later applying the template to other effects or video clips in the sequence.

Saving an Effect Template

You can save the parameters from the rendered effect in the Effect mode window and reuse them for another effect.

To save an Effect template

¥ Drag the effectÕs Effect icon from the Effect mode window to a bin.

Page 70: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

70

¥ To save the source for an effect, hold down the Option key while dragging the effectÕs Effect icon from the Effect mode window to a bin.

Effect icons for open bins are also displayed in the Effect palette.

This creates a new Effect template in the bin, containing the parameter setting information for the rendered effect. The new Effect template is identiÞed in the bin by its Effect icon.

¥ To rename the template, click on the template name below the icon and type a new name.

Applying an Effect Template

You can take an Effect template that has been saved in a bin and apply the template and its parameters to other transitions or segments in your sequence.

To apply an Effect template

To apply an effect template, use one of the following methods:

¥ Click the Effect template in the bin or in the Effect palette and drag it to either the Timeline or the Effect Preview monitor in the Effect mode window.

Effect icon

Effect template

Page 71: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

71

¥ Place the Position indicator on a segment or transition and double-click the Effect template in the bin or Effect palette.

This applies all of the parameters from the Effect template to the new video clip that you are creating.

To apply only part of an Effect template

¥ Click the Effect template in the bin or in the Effect palette and drag it to the speciÞc effect parameter pane in the Effect mode window.

The Effect template is applied only to the effect parameter pane you selected.

n Do not drag the Effect template through the Timeline window, because this deselects the effect.

Effect parameter pane

Effect template from bin or from the Effect palette

Page 72: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

72

Using Multilayer Effects

Some effects are made up of multiple video layers (tracks). The proce-dures for applying multilayer effects differ slightly from single-layer effects. This section explains how to create some of the more common multilayer effects Ñ the Key effects.

Creating a Chroma or Luma Key Effect

Use the Chroma Key effect to replace one part of the video image with another video image based on color. Use the Luma Key to replace one part of the video image with another video image based on luminance (brightness).

To create a Chroma Key effect

The Chroma Key effect is used most frequently with a foreground image shot in front of a highly saturated color screen (for example, a meteorologist against a weather map). Use the following procedure to create a Chroma Key effect:

1. Create a sequence with two layers. Place the foreground image on track V2 and place the background image on track V1.

2. Choose Effect Palette from the Tools menu or press k-8.

3. Drag the Chroma Key effect from the Effect palette to the clip on track V2.

The key effect is added. Ultimate Blue is the default key color. To change the key color use the procedures described in Steps 4 and 5.

4. Place the blue Position indicator over the key effect in the Timeline and click the Effect Mode button.

Page 73: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

73

5. If necessary, adjust the key color either by changing the Hue, Satu-ration, and Luminance sliders; or move the mouse to the Color Preview window to activate the Eyedropper. Click and drag the Eyedropper into the Effect Preview monitor and release the mouse button on the color you want to select from the video image.

The selected color appears in the Color Preview window.

6. Set the Gain and Softness parameters. For an explanation of these parameters, see the topic ÒKey Control ParametersÓ on page 165.

Creating a Matte Key Effect

The Matte Key effect uses three layers of video to create the effect. The bottom layer is the background image, the middle layer is the fore-ground image, and the top layer contains the matte or alpha channel.

To create a Matte Key effect

1. Create a sequence with three video layers.

2. Load a high-contrast image into the Source monitor and edit it onto track V3.

n If the image is not high enough in contrast, you can adjust the contrast by applying the Color Effect and adjusting its parameters in Effect mode.

3. Edit the foreground image onto track V2.

4. Edit the background image onto track V1.

5. Choose Effect Palette from the Tools menu or press k-8.

6. Choose the Key palette and drag the Matte Key effect to the clip on track V3.

Eyedropper over the Color Preview window

Page 74: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

74

7. Click the Track Selector for track V3. You should see tracks V2 and V1 through the high-contrast image on track V3.

8. Place the blue Position indicator over the Matte Key effect and ren-der the effect.

For an example of a Matte Key effect, see the topic ÒMatte KeyÓ on page 219.

On systems with the 3D Effects option, see ÒUsing Matte Keys with 3D EffectsÓ on page 316.

Working with Imported Graphics and Animation

This section describes two different approaches to editing with imported graphic images depending upon whether the image was imported as a master clip with no alpha channel (an opaque graphic element), or as a matte-key effect clip with an alpha channel (a keyable graphic element for video overlay).

These alternatives apply to both single-frame graphic images or ani-mation. In addition, you can edit imported images into sequences using standard Composer effects. These topics are described in this section.

n For more information on importing graphic and animation clips, see the appropriate userÕs guide.

Matte Key clip with alpha channel

Graphic master clip with no alpha channel

Page 75: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

75

Editing with Imported Matte Key Clips

When an imported clip includes an alpha channel for keying the graphic over video, it appears in the bin with an effect icon and the words ÒMatte KeyÓ attached to the front of the clip name and Ò(With Alpha)Ó attached to the end. You can shorten or change this name at any time.

Both single-frame graphic images (such as a single PICT Þle) and mul-tiple-frame animation sequences (such as a PICT sequence Þle) appear in the bin in the same form after import, and you use the same editing techniques for both. You can edit this type of clip into a sequence as a standard matte-key overlay.

n Only PICT Þles and PICT sequence Þles can be used as real-time keyed graphics. Quicktime Þles and PICS animation Þles cannot be used as real-time keyed graphics.

To edit a matte key clip into the sequence

1. Edit the main video sequence onto track V1.

2. Add track V2 to the sequence by choosing New Video Track from the Clip menu, or pressing kÐY.

n You must edit matte key clips onto track V2 or higher to achieve the keying effect. If you edit a matte key clip onto V1, the image is keyed over black.

3. Play the sequence and mark an IN and OUT where you want to overlay the graphic.

4. Load a Matte Key clip into the Source monitor. Mark an IN toward the center of the clip if it is a still.

5. In the Timeline, click and drag the Source monitor V1 Track Selec-tor to the Record monitor V2 Track Selector to patch the video from V1 of the Source monitor to V2 in the sequence.

Page 76: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

76

6. Click the Overwrite button to edit the Matte Key onto V2.

The graphic is keyed over the video on V1.

In the Timeline, the graphic appears on the track above the main video sequence. A Matte Key effect icon appears in the Timeline segment. The blue dot in the icon indicates that the effect must be rendered before it can be played.

7. Adjust effect parameters in Effect mode if necessary using proce-dures described in the topic ÒWorking in Effect ModeÓ on page 45.

n If the keyed portions of the images are the reverse of the intended effect, then you must reimport and reverse on import. Refer to ÒImporting FilesÓ in the userÕs guide for more information.

Record Monitor Track Selector

Source Monitor Track Selector

Timeline

Before After

Record Monitor Monitor Selector

Source Monitor Monitor Selector

Matte Key graphic keyed over video

Monitor Selector

Key effect icon

Page 77: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

77

8. Use the standard effect editing procedures to preview, render, or play the Matte Key clip.

n Make sure the Monitor selector is on the topmost track, in this case V2, in order to see the complete effect.

Editing with Imported Master Clips

When an imported clip does not include an alpha channel for keying the graphic over video, its icon is the standard master clip icon. This is true for both single-image graphics or animation sequences. You can edit this type of clip into a sequence as an opaque image or animation (in other words, as a single layer) using basic editing techniques described in this section.

To edit an imported master clip into the sequence, do the following:

1. Load a graphic clip into the Source monitor and load a sequence into the Record monitor.

2. In the Source monitor, mark an IN at the start of the clip and mark an OUT to specify the duration of the graphic.

3. In the Record monitor, mark an IN where you want to edit the graphic clip into the sequence.

4. Select the Source and Record monitorsÕ Track Selectors.

5. Click the Splice or Overwrite button to add the opaque graphic to the sequence.

The opaque image appears in the sequence. In the Timeline, the graphic looks like a standard video clip edited into the sequence.

Page 78: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

78

6. Play the clip using the standard editing procedures to play and edit the graphic, the same as you would a video clip.

Nesting Effects

You can use the Composer system to place effect tracks inside one another to better combine multiple images and digital video effects. This involves a process known as nesting, which allows you to use the Timeline to step into a trackÕs edit, perform a series of editing opera-tions, then step out to view and render the effect as one segment on the track.

You can edit up to 24 video track layers (depending on the Composer model you are using). Into each layer of video, you can additionally nest (stack inside) up to 24 additional video tracks. In addition, you can step into each video track indeÞnitely, constrained only by your Composer systemÕs memory.

You can use nesting when you want to create layered effects. In this case, the nested layers are treated as one element during the transition. Since transition effects, such as dissolves, fades, and wipes, are not multi-layered, nesting is not applicable to these type of effects. Nesting effects are also not applicable to audio tracks.

Another use of nesting is to constrain one effect using another effect. For example, you can use a Circle Wipe to constrain an image poster-ization inside a region.

Opaque graphic master clip

Page 79: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

79

n Nested effects do not appear in the Edit Decision List (EDL).

Nesting a Title within a Picture-in-Picture

If you want to create a picture-in-picture that moves and includes a title, you will have to create a nested effect so the title moves with the picture-in-picture as one unit.

To nest a Title within a Picture-in-Picture

1. Create a sequence with two video layers.

2. Choose Effect Palette from the Tools menu or press k-8.

3. Open the Blend palette and apply the Picture-In-Picture effect to the segment on track V2.

4. Click the V2 Track Selector.

5. Place the blue Position indicator on the Picture-In-Picture effect in the Timeline and click the Step In button.

6. Choose New Video Track from the Clip menu or press k-Y to add a new video track.

Page 80: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

80

7. Choose New Title from the Clip menu to create and save a title with a video background.

8. Edit this title in the Source monitor onto the new V3 track.

9. To step out of the Picture-In-Picture effect, click the Step Out but-ton.

Your Picture-In-Picture effect now has a title within it. If you animate the Picture-In-Picture effect, the title moves with it.

Nesting a Split Screen

If you want to create a split screen that transitions into or out of another clip, you have to nest one layer inside the other. To create this effect, you can use a nested Edge Wipe to position the images.

To nest a split screen

1. Edit one of the video sources onto track V1.

2. Choose Effect Palette from the Tools menu.

3. Open the Edge Wipe palette and drag the Horizontal wipe effect onto track V1.

Page 81: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

81

The monitor now contains half the shot on track V1 and black on the other half.

4. Click the Step In button to step into the Horizontal wipe effect on track V1.

5. Edit the second video source onto the blank track V1 to replace the black half of the screen with the second video source.

6. Click the Step Out button.

You now have a split screen that is nested on one track. You can now treat this split screen as a single element and easily transition to another clip.

Another Nesting Technique

You can also nest effects by using a combination of keys as follows:

1. Create a sequence and add a segment effect.

2. Either choose Effect Palette from the Tools menu, press k-8, or click the Effect palette button in Effect mode.

3. Option-drag another effect from the Effect palette to the Timeline and place it on top of the Þrst effect.

4. Option-double-click the effectÕs icon in the Timeline.

The Þrst effect is automatically nested inside the second effect.

Expanding Nested Effects in the Timeline

You can double click on a nested effect to expand the effect in the Timeline and display the effectÕs contents. All editing and patching features are available for the expanded effect and you can listen to audio while playing the nested effect.

Page 82: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

82

The following procedure describes how to use the new feature.

Nesting a title within a picture-in-picture

If you want to create a moving picture-in-picture that includes a title, you will have to create a nested effect so the title moves with the pic-ture-in-picture as one unit.

The following illustration shows a title within a Picture-in-Picture effect.

Use the following procedure to nest a title within a Picture-in-Picture effect:

1. Create a sequence with two video layers. Put your foreground video in V2 and your background video in V1.

2. Create a title effect and place it in an open bin. For information on how to create a title see Chapter 2.

3. Choose Effect Palette from the Tools menu.

Page 83: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

83

4. Choose the Blend effect category and apply the Picture-in-Picture effect to the segment on V2. The following illustration shows an example.

5. Click one of the segment buttons at the bottom of the Timeline.

6. Double-click the Picture in Picture effect icon in the segment. The Timeline expands to display the nested tracks 1.1 and 1.2.

7. Deselect the Segment button so you can edit the tracks.

8. Drag the Source Monitor track selector to nested track 1.2.

9. Choose New Video Track from the Clip menu. The Composer sys-tem creates nested track 1.3.

10. Drag the Source Monitor track selector to nested track 1.3.

11. Edit the title into the new nested track 1.3 as shown below.

Segment buttons

Source MonitorTrack Selector

Page 84: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

84

12. Select one of the Segment mode buttons again and double-click the Picture-in-Picture effect on track V2.

The Composer system collapses the nested track.

Submaster Editing

The Sub-master effect is on the Image Effect palette. When you render this effect the Composer system creates a single media Þle from sev-eral clips or effects in a sequence. This saves the new submaster clip to the disk as a single media Þle. However, each element that makes up the composite is left untouched so you can still manipulate any ele-ment.

The Sub-master effect is a single-track segment effect and is only avail-able if your Composer system supports the nested editing option.

n You can nest up to 24 tracks inside a Sub-master effect.

n An EDL for a sequence that contains a Sub-master effect represents the con-tents of the submaster as a single cut. To work around this, you can create a new sequence with the contents of the submastered material and generate a separate EDL for that sequence.

Page 85: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

85

Submaster Editing of Multiple Clips

The Sub-master effect is useful when you want to play back band-width-limited sequences, such as sequences made of several seconds worth of single-frame clips. It is much faster to use the new submaster clip than to use older methods such as applying a graphic, Picture-In-Picture, Mask, or Resize effect. Normally, submaster effects render at about the same rate as motion effects.

To apply a Sub-master effect to multiple clips

1. Choose New Video Track from the Clip menu or press k-Y.

2. On the new video track (V2 in the example), mark two Add Edits at the start and end of the clips to be submastered.

3. Choose Effect Palette from the Tools menu or press k-8.

4. Click and drag the Sub-master effect icon from the Image Effect palette between the Add Edits you added on the new track.

The system creates a new single-track segment clip from the clips below the Sub-master effect.

Add Edit marks on new track V2; bracket clips on track V1

Sub-master effect on track V2

Page 86: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

86

Submaster Editing of Multiple Effects

The Sub-master effect is also useful when you have combined effects, such as when you have layered or nested effects, or when you have segments or motion effects that begin or end with a transition effect.

Rendering a Sub-master effect creates a single media Þle that contains all the selected effects.

n A Sub-master effect maintains links to the original media Þles so you should not delete the original Þles. If you want to combine tracks to create a sequence that is independent from the original media Þles, use Video Mixdown.

n The Sub-master effect does not render each track separately, so you cannot play each track individually, and the blue dot remains in the effect icon. In addition, you cannot delete a track below a Sub-master effect or it becomes unrendered.

To apply a Sub-master effect to effects

1. Choose New Video Track from the Clip menu or press k-Y.

2. On the new video track (V4 in the following example), mark two Add Edits at the start and end of the clips that contain effects to be submastered.

3. Choose Effect Palette from the Tools menu or press k-8.

4. Click and drag the Sub-master effect icon from in the Image Effect palette between the Add Edits you added on the new track.

Add Edit marks on new track V4; bracket clips on tracks V1, V2, V3

Page 87: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

87

5. Highlight the V4 Track Selector and deselect any other tracks.

6. Place the blue Position indicator over the Sub-master effect in the Timeline.

7. Choose Render at Position from the Clip menu.

A dialog box appears:

8. Select the effectsÕ quality. The default quality is Highest Quality. This parameter does not apply to all effects.

9. If you do not want to render the real-time effects in the selected group of effects, select the parameter Skip Real-Time Effects.

10. Click OK.

All effects at the Position indicator are rendered.

Sub-master effect on track V4

Page 88: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

88

Collapsing Layers into One Sub-master Effect

You can use the Collapse button to build a multilayer effect. This fea-ture allows you to nest your effects after building them on separate tracks.

The Collapse function allows you to build your effect at the topmost level and when you are Þnished collapse the layers automatically into one Sub-master effect. This function is useful for simplifying a sequence with complex compositing. Once you have collapsed a com-plex composite, you can easily add transition effects to the start and end of the newly created submaster composite effect.

After the tracks are collapsed into a Sub-master effect the Composer system recognizes a Sub-master effect as a multiple-layer effect instead of a single-layer effect. This allows you to add chroma keys and other additional multiple-layer effects to the nested tracks within a Sub-mas-ter effect.

n You can drag Òtwo-channelÓ effects (such as chroma key) onto Sub-master effects if the submaster contains two or more nested tracks. This is useful after performing a Collapse operation to composite the newly created submaster over another background.

To collapse a sequence

1. Highlight all of the tracks you want to collapse. The tracks must be adjacent.

2. Mark an IN and OUT point around the area to be collapsed.

3. Select the Command Palette from the Tools menu.

4. Press the Collapse button.

The following procedure shows an alternate way to use the Collapse feature:

1. Enter Segment mode.

Page 89: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

89

2. Select the segments you want to collapse.

3. Go to the Tools menu and select Command palette.

4. Press the Collapse button.

n You can map the Collapse button to the Source and Record monitors.

Video Mixdown

Video Mixdown allows you to combine several tracks into a new mas-ter clip. You can use Video Mixdown after you have Þnished building your sequence and want to make it into one piece (for example, a stan-dard opening to a program). It can be useful for a complex sequence you need to use repeatedly or if you want to add a motion effect to an entire sequence.

Video Mixdown is similar to Collapse; the difference is the end result.

¥ In Collapse you collapse the tracks into a Sub-master effect. After you perform a Collapse, you are still able to step inside the sub-master nest and continue to work on the individual elements that make up the composite effect.

¥ In Video Mixdown, your end result is a new master clip made up of all the tracks you built on different layers. Those tracks become one clip; you cannot separate the tracks to work on them or step into the sequence.

n You cannot generate an EDL or Þlm cut list for a sequence that contains a video mixdown. To work around this, you can either remove the video mix-down or maintain a version of the sequence that does not contain a video mix-down.

To perform a Video Mixdown

1. Highlight the tracks you want to mix down.

2. Mark an IN and OUT point around the area to mix down.

Page 90: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

90

3. Select Video Mixdown from the Special menu.

The Video Mixdown dialog appears:

4. Choose a Target Disk for storing the new master clip and click OK.

A thermometer appears, indicating the progress of the Video Mix-down. When completed, a new clip appears in the bin along with the sequence, and a new media Þle is created on the target disk.

Page 91: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

91

Managing Your Media Files

When you render an effect, create a title, or import a graphic Þle, the Composer system creates two elements: an effect clip and a precom-pute master clip (also known as a rendered effect media Þle).

The Composer system only overwrites or automatically deletes a media Þle from your disk drive if you:

1. Render an effect two or more times with the Render Effect button

2. Close the project before either an Auto Save or a manual save occurs

In this case the Composer system automatically saves the last-ren-dered effect and deletes the earlier, unreferenced versions. This autodeletion only applies to effects rendered since the last save or project close.

This prevents you from deleting media that may be necessary to play other versions of the sequence. If you want to remove media Þles from your disk to save disk space you will have to manually delete the Þles.

Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files

Use this procedure to locate and delete unwanted media Þles on your disk drive for your current project.

1. Choose Media Tool from the Tools menu.

The Media Tool dialog box appears:

Page 92: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

92

2. Select Current Project and Precompute Master Clips and click OK.

The Media Tool window appears and displays all precompute master clips associated with your current project. To determine which precomputes your project is using, continue to the next step.

3. Resize the Media Tool window, until you can see all or most of the precomputes.

4. Open the bin that contains the sequences and highlight one or multiple sequences.

5. Choose Select Media Relatives from the Bin menu.

In the Media Tool window and in other open bins, all the precom-putes master clips are highlighted. These clips point to the media Þles that the selected sequences are using.

6. Choose Reverse Selection from the Bin menu to highlight all the precompute master clips you are not using in the selected sequences.

7. Press Delete on the keyboard.

The following dialog box appears:

Page 93: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

93

8. Select the precompute Þles to delete.

Page 94: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

94

CHAPTER 2

Creating and Editing Titles and Graphic Objects

This chapter explains how to create and edit titles and credits, includ-ing graphic objects. Throughout this chapter, the term ÒtitleÓ refers to both titles and graphics.

The Title tool enables you to create titles that incorporate text, graphic objects, and video. You can superimpose a title over video or display a title as an opaque image over a color background. The way you create the title and edit it into a sequence determines which of these effects you will achieve.

Each title you create is saved in a bin and can be edited into your sequences, using the standard Composer system editing procedures.

Task Overview — Creating and Editing Titles

The following is an overview of the tasks you will perform to create and edit a title:

¥ Create a new title with the Title tool and save the title in a bin.

¥ Add a new video track to the Timeline if you want to key the title over video.

Page 95: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

95

¥ Edit the title into the sequence.

For an explanation of each of these tasks, see the sections that follow.

Creating New Titles

You can create a new title with or without a sequence in the Timeline. However, if you want to create a title with a video background, you can load a video clip into the Record monitor to use as a reference frame while you create the title. The video reference frame you select appears in the background of the Title tool while you create the title. The reference frame makes it easier to position text and objects exactly where you want them and to select colors from the frame to use in the text and objects.

Because the Composer system automatically loads the new title into the Source window, you can immediately use the standard editing procedures to edit the title into your sequence. If you create multiple titles in the same Title tool session, the system loads the last title you create into the Source window.

n After you create a title with a particular video format (PAL or NTSC), if you want to create a title for a project using the other video format, you must exit and restart the Composer system.

The Composer system saves each title you create into a bin. You can load a title into the Source window at any time or drag the Title Effect icon from the bin to a segment in the Timeline. You can also drag a title from the bin onto an existing title in the Timeline; this causes the exist-ing title to be replaced.

n The procedures described in this section use a video reference frame to create a title.

Page 96: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

96

To create a new title

1. In the Record monitor, place the blue position indicator on the video frame to be used as a reference.

2. Choose New Title from the Clip menu.

The Title tool window appears.

3. Use the Title tool to create the title and save it in a bin.

Page 97: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

97

Understanding the Title Tool Window

The Title Tool window has several major components:

¥ The tool bar at the bottom of the screen

¥ A video or color background

¥ The title that you create

¥ The Safe Title and safe action area guidelines. For more informa-tion, see ÒUsing Title and Action GuidelinesÓ on page 98.

The following illustration shows a title over a video background:

In addition, there are title-related menu items on the File, Edit, Object, and Alignment menus. These menu items are described in this chapter.

Tool bar

Safe ActionArea

Videobackground

Title

Safe TitleArea

Page 98: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

98

Setting Up the Drawing Environment

This section describes some aspects of the Title tool that you can use to set up your titling/drawing session.

n You can set or change these features at any time during your work on a title.

Viewing Anti-Aliased Titles

Titles are always saved in anti-aliased format.

Text and objects in titles are created anti-aliased with an 8-bit alpha channel. Anti-aliasing ensures that text, lines, and object edges appear smooth, regardless of size. If you choose Preview mode from the Objects menu, you can see the title drawn with anti-aliasing, just as it will be saved. However, your work can progress more quickly if you turn off Preview mode because the images are drawn faster on the screen.

Deselect Preview mode before closing the Title tool to make subse-quent opening faster.

To display anti-aliased titles, choose Preview mode from the Object menu. When you do this, the system puts a check mark next to Pre-view mode in the menu. By default, Preview mode is off.

Using Title and Action Guidelines

By default, the system displays two outlined boxes in the Title tool window to use as guidelines (see the illustration at the beginning of this section). The inner box is the Safe Title area. All text for television broadcast should remain within this inner box. The outer box is the Safe Action area for video display.

These guidelines are self-adjusting for PAL and NTSC projects.

Displaying Safe Title Area and Safe Action Area Guidelines

To display the safe title area or safe action area guidelines, choose safe title area from the Object menu.

Page 99: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

99

For Film projects, see ÒDisplaying the Aspect Ratio Grid for FilmÓ on page 155

Using Safe Colors

If you plan to use your title for television broadcast, you can set the Safe Colors command in the Object menu. This command displays only low saturation colors for use in text, objects, and background. Colors with low saturation look best when combined with video. By default, Safe Colors is turned on.

Displaying Only Safe Colors

To display only safe colors, choose Safe Colors from the Object menu.

Selecting a Background

Use the Video Background button to toggle between a video back-ground or an opaque color background.

Using a Video Background

If there is a sequence in the Record monitor, the Title tool opens with a video background. The location of the Position indicator in the Time-line at the time you open the Title tool determines the video frame that displays. If there is no sequence in the Record monitor, the Title tool opens with a black background.

The Video Background button is green when you are creating a title for display over a video background.

Background color window Video Background button

Page 100: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

100

Use the background video frame as a reference. It does not become part of the title you create. You can edit the title anywhere else in the current sequence or in another sequence.

Creating a Color Background

You can create a title that appears over an opaque color background. To do so, you can:

1. Click the Video Background button to toggle off the video back-ground. The V in the Video Background button turns black.

2. Hold the mouse down over the Background color window.

The Title Tool Color Picker dialog box appears

3. Use the Title Tool Color Picker dialog box, eyedropper, or Macin-tosh Color Picker to select a color. See ÒChoosing Colors and Set-ting TransparencyÓ on page 119 for a description of how to use these tools. The default background color is black.

n When you create a title with a color background, it is opaque and it cannot be used to key over video.

Displaying a Grid

You can display a grid to help you position text and objects. The visi-ble grid does not appear when you save the graphic.

To display a grid, choose Visible Grid from the Alignment menu.

Title Tool Color Picker Dialog Box

Eyedropper

DisplaysMacintosh Color Picker

Page 101: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

101

Snapping to Grid

The snap grid is an invisible grid that helps position and connect objects. When you create objects, they will snap to the nearest grid line. The snap grid has four lines for each line in the visible grid.

To snap to a grid, choose Snap to Grid from the Alignment menu.

Bringing the Title Tool Window to the Foreground

If the Title Tool window becomes obscured by another window, you can instruct the Composer system to redisplay the window. Choose Title Tool from the Windows menu.

Page 102: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

102

Understanding the Tool Bar

At the bottom of the Title tool window are tools and menus you can use for creating and editing text and objects. They work much like similar tools in other draw and paint programs.

When the Title tool opens, the Text tool is automatically selected, and the cursor becomes an I-beam. To select another tool, click the toolÕs icon.

n After you use a tool, the system reverts to the Selection tool, and the cursor becomes an arrow. To prevent a tool from automatically reverting to the Selec-tion tool, double-click the toolÕs icon.

The following illustration identiÞes the different sections of the tool bar.

Table 2-1 brießy describes each section of the tool bar:

Text attribute tools Line attribute

tools

Shadow tools

Backgroundselection tools

Transparency selection

Color selectionSave parameters toa Style sheet

Drawing tools

Video placement tool

Text tool

Selection tool

Blend andTransparency preview

Display/select Styles

Page 103: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

103

Table 2-1 Tool Bar Elements

Tool Description

Selection tool Changes the cursor from the text I-beam to an arrow and allows you to select text or objects for operations such as moving and color modiÞcation. See ÒThe Selection ToolÓ on page 104.

Text tool Changes the cursor to an I-beam and allows you to enter text.

Video placement tool Changes the cursor to a hand and allows you to scroll the entire video clip in the Title Tool window within the frame.

Drawing tools Allow you to draw boxes, circles, ovals, and lines.

Style sheet Allows you to set up basic title and drawing parameters that you can use throughout your work.

Display/select Styles Displays examples of the styles you deÞned and allows you to select one.

Text attribute tools Allow you to set various text attributes such as font, font size, kerning, and leading.

Color selection Allows you to change the color of text and objects.

Transparency selection Allows you to change the transparency levels of text and objects.

Blend and Transparency preview

When a color blend or transparency is associated with a style or object, this area displays the current values.

Shadow tools Allow you to create drop shadows and depth shadows for text and objects.

Line attributes Allows you to change the corners of boxes, line and border thickness, and arrowhead styles.

Background selection tools

Allows you to switch between a video and opaque background. Also allows you to change the color of opaque backgrounds.

Page 104: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

104

The Selection Tool

The selection tool is one of the most frequently used tools. You use the selection tool when performing operations on the objects you create.

To select an object, choose the Selection tool (arrow) and click an object. Selection handles appear around the object. To select multiple objects, Shift-click with the Selection tool or click and drag the cursor to draw a lasso around the objects.

Selection tool

Selectionhandles

Page 105: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

105

Working with Text

By default, the Text tool is active when you open the Title tool, and you can begin entering text.

To use the Text tool at any other time, click the Text tool icon, click any-where within the title frame, and begin typing. A blinking vertical bar indicates your cursor position in the frame.

The Text tool remains selected until you select another tool.

To create text

1. Click the Text tool on the tool bar.

The cursor becomes an I-beam.

2. Click the position in the frame where you want to add text.

A blinking insertion point appears.

3. Type the text. Text is word wrapped automatically. To insert a line return, press Shift-Return.

4. When you have Þnished typing, click the Selection tool on the tool bar.

n You might want to drag the right side of the text selection box to eliminate any unused space, especially if you want to use the Alignment menu com-mands. To drag the right side, click the middle handle on the right side of the text selection box and drag it to the left until it is closer to the text.

Text tool

Page 106: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

106

To reposition text

Option-click anywhere in the Title tool window to switch between the Selection tool the Text tool.

1. Click the Selection tool on the tool bar.

2. Either select and drag it to a new position or use the commands on the Alignment menu to position the text.

For a description of each of these commands, see ÒAligning ObjectsÓ on page 137.

To edit an existing text string

Choose the Text tool and click anywhere in the text string. You can per-form the following tasks:

¥ Drag select characters.

¥ Use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands from the Edit menu.

¥ Use the arrow keys to move around within the text string.

¥ Use the Delete key.

¥ Type additional characters.

¥ Change the kerning on a character basis as described in ÒLeading AdjustmentÓ on page 112.

¥ Drag select portions of the text string and change font attributes such as font, point size, and italics.

As previously mentioned, text strings automatically word wrap as you enter them. To change the word wrap, use the Selection tool to select the text and drag the right-hand corner to shorten or lengthen the text object.

To view anti-aliased text

For information on viewing smooth text, see ÒViewing Anti-Aliased TitlesÓ on page 98.

Page 107: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

107

The Text Formatting Tools

The text formatting tools control the appearance of text. If a text object is selected when you change an attribute, the Composer system auto-matically applies the attribute to the object.

The text formatting tools allow you to change the following text char-acteristics:

¥ Current font

¥ Bold and italic

¥ Point size

¥ JustiÞcation

¥ Kerning

¥ Leading

This section describes how to change these characteristics on a text string basis. You can also change these attributes on a character-by-character basis by editing the text string as described in ÒTo edit an existing text stringÓ on page 106.

You can also modify the following text attributes on a text string basis:

¥ Color (see ÒAdjusting the ColorÓ on page 120)

¥ Transparency (see ÒAdjusting the TransparencyÓ on page 124)

¥ Drop and depth shadows (see ÒWorking with ShadowsÓ on page 125)

Text formatting tools

Page 108: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

108

¥ Outlines surrounding text (see ÒTo select a line or border widthÓ on page 116)

While you type text, only the text color is apparent. Shadows, outlines, and other color attributes appear when you Þnish typing the text and click the Selection tool.

n If you have multiple text elements in a title, and you want to give each a dif-ferent appearance, then create separate text strings.

Setting the Default Text Attributes

When you start the Composer application and open the Title tool the Composer system uses default text attributes (including 48 point Geneva font). You can change the defaults at any time. Changes you make to the default text attributes apply until you quit the application.

To change the default text attributes

1. Click the Selection tool (arrow).

2. Click in the Title tool window but do not select any text.

3. Change any of the text attributes.

To use the new defaults

Click the Text tool to enter text mode, click anywhere and enter text. Now whenever you start typing a new text string the Composer sys-tem uses your new defaults.

Font Selection

The font selection menu shows the current font and allows you to change the font. By default, the font listed is the Macintosh preferred system font.

Page 109: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

109

To change the font

1. Click the Font Selection menu to display the font pop-up menu.

2. Select a font from the menu.

The system displays the name in the font selection box and uses this font for text until you change it during the editing session.

If a text object is selected the font selection menu displays the font of the text object.

Text Justification

Below the font selection menu are the buttons for text justiÞcation. Text justiÞcation controls the alignment of all text within a text element.

Click the left Text justiÞcation button to left justify text within the frame. Click the center button to center text as you type within the frame. Click the right button to right justify the text as you type.

Font Selection menu

Text Justification buttons

Page 110: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

110

Text Kerning

Kerning improves the appearance of titles by controlling the amount of space between characters. You can expand or condense the character spacing to make text more readable or to create special effects, such as dramatically expanded spacing in a title.

The text kerning controls are located beneath the text justiÞcation con-trols. A selection box displaying a number indicates the current kern-ing value, and the downward-pointing arrowhead enables you to access the kerning menu.

You can choose from predeÞned kerning options or enter a value to change the spacing. Positive numbers increase the spacing; negative numbers decrease the spacing. Larger text usually can be kerned tighter to save space, while smaller text sizes are usually more read-able with looser kerning. You can also manually kern individual char-acter pairs.

Kerning selection box and kerning selection button

Helvetica font, loose kerning

Helvetica font, normal kerning

Helvetica font, tight kerning

Page 111: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

111

To adjust text kerning

The most common way to adjust kerning is to manually kern individ-ual character pairs. For example, if you mix italic and plain versions of a font in a title, you might want to adjust the spacing between charac-ters.

1. Choose the Text tool.

2. Click between a character pair or select a group of characters to be kerned.

3. Hold down the Option key and use the left or right arrow keys to increase or decrease the kerning.

To use the kerning menu options

You can use the menu options to select predeÞned kerning settings and to specify your own custom kerning value.

1. Select the text.

2. Click the arrow next to the kerning selection box to access the kerning menu.

3. Select a kern value:

¥ Pair Kerning turns pair kerning on and off. Pair kerning elimi-nates excessive space between some character pairs. Note that pair kerning only works on fonts that support kerning tables (for example, Palatino).

¥ Loose adds space between letters.

¥ Normal leaves spacing unchanged.

Page 112: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

112

¥ Tight closes up the spacing between letters.

¥ Enter a positive or negative numerical value for custom kern-ing.

You can choose the kerning value before you type text.

If you select a value, the corresponding number is displayed in the window, and the system applies the appropriate kerning to the selected text. Kerning values are a percentage of the point size.

You can also select the number and use the up and down arrow keys to change the value incrementally.

Leading Adjustment

Use leading to adjust the line spacing between lines in a title. Leading is measured in points, from baseline to baseline of the lines of text. The Title tool uses the leading that is built into the font as the default. Posi-tive leading values add space between lines; negative values decrease space. You might want to add leading for sans serif, tall, or boldface fonts, and for fonts with a strong vertical emphasis.

To set leading

1. Click in the Leading adjustment selection box.

2. Enter a number to indicate the desired leading value.

The Composer system adjusts leading immediately.

Leading Adjustment selection box

Page 113: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

113

Point Size

The point size controls the size of the selected text. A point is a typo-graphical unit of measure. There are 12 points to the pica and 72 points to the inch.

To change the point size

1. Click the Point Size button.

The Point Size menu appears.

You can enter the point size before you type text.

2. Choose a standard point size from the menu or enter a point size between 6 and 500 into the Point Size window and press Return.

You can also select the number and use the up and down arrow keys to change the value incrementally.

Point Size buttonCurrently selected point size

Page 114: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

114

Bold and Italics

The bold and italics buttons are located under the point size selection window.

In addition, the Object menu contains commands for bold and italics.

To change the text style, select the text you want to change and click the appropriate button or select the appropriate command from the Object menu. You can also use ShiftÐkÐB and ShiftÐkÐI.

Using the Drawing Tools

The drawing tools enable you to draw squares, rectangles, circles, ovals, and lines. To use the drawing tools, select one of these shapes.

To draw a square or a rectangle

1. Select the Rectangle tool on the tool bar.

The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer.

2. Hold down the cursor and drag to create an object.

Bold and Italics buttons

Drawing tools

Page 115: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

115

n Shift-dragging constrains the Rectangle tool to create a square.

To draw a circle or oval

1. Select the Oval tool on the tool bar.

The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer.

2. Hold down the cursor and drag to create an object.

n Shift-dragging constrains the Oval tool to create a circle.

To draw a line

1. Select the Line tool (slanted line) on the tool bar.

The cursor becomes a crosshair pointer.

2. Hold down the cursor and drag to create a line.

n Shift-dragging constrains the Line tool to a straight horizontal or vertical line.

Selecting Line Attributes

Use the Line Attribute tools to round the corners of boxes, select the width of lines and borders, and add arrowheads to line endpoints.

You can also change the following drawing attributes:

Line Attribute tools

Page 116: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

116

¥ Color (see ÒAdjusting the ColorÓ on page 120)

¥ Transparency (see ÒAdjusting the TransparencyÓ on page 124)

¥ Drop and depth shadows (see ÒWorking with ShadowsÓ on page 125)

If you do not select an object and you choose a line attribute, the sys-tem makes that the default for any new objects that you create.

To round box corners

1. Select a box.

2. Click the Corner button (the left button).

The Corner Selection menu appears.

3. Choose a rounding option from the pop-up menu.

If you choose the Custom Radius option, a dialog box appears for you to enter a custom corner radius.

To select a line or border width

1. Select an object (such as a line, shape, or text string).

2. Click the Solid Line button (the middle button) and choose a line width.

Custom radius option

Page 117: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

117

3. Choose from the standard width selections or choose the Custom Width option to open a dialog box and enter a custom width.

4. If you choose the Custom Width option, in the dialog box type a whole number in pixels to specify a custom width. Use a width of 1 or greater for lines and 0 or greater for object outlines. The maxi-mum width is 200.

If you selected a line for modiÞcation, the width of the line changes. If you selected an object for modiÞcation, the width of the outline changes.

To add arrowheads to a line

1. Select a line.

2. Click the Arrowhead button on the right edge of the tool bar.

The Arrowhead Selection menu appears.

Custom Width option

Turns off border

Page 118: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

118

3. Choose an arrowhead style from the pop-up menu or choose the Arrowhead Option button as described in the following section.

To change the arrowhead size

1. Select a line.

2. Click the Arrowhead button on the right.

3. Choose the Edit Arrowhead option (diagonal arrowhead) from the pop-up menu.

The Edit Arrowhead Size dialog box appears.

4. Click the handle on the arrowhead and drag it vertically or hori-zontally to resize and reshape it.

The shape of the arrow-head is in scale with the line width.

5. Click OK. The arrowhead is applied to the line.

Edit arrowhead option

Remove arrowhead

Handle

Page 119: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

119

Choosing Colors and Setting Transparency

You can select the color and transparency for objects, shadows, and borders.

The following illustration shows the boxes associated with color and transparency:

¥ The Color selection boxes control the Þll (Fill), shadow (Shad), and border (Bord) color selection, respectively.

¥ The Transparency selection boxes control the Þll, shadow, and bor-der transparency selection, respectively.

¥ The Blend and Transparency preview windows appear when you select the Þll or border color or transparency selection box.

If you select a color selection box, the top windows show the two colors that are used to create the blend. The bottom window shows the blended color and allows you to control the direction of the blend or transparency.

If you select a transparency selection box, the top windows show the two transparency values that are used to create the blend. The bottom window allows you to control the direction of the trans-parency blend.

Blend and Transparency preview

Transparency selectionColor selection

Page 120: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

120

Adjusting the Color

You can select a color from the Title Tool Color Picker, use an eyedrop-per to select a color from any open application on your computer, or use the Macintosh Color Picker to select a color. All of these features are available through the Title Tool Color Picker (see Figure 2-1).

Figure 2-1 Title Tool Color Picker

Follow these procedures to select object, shadow, or outline color. The box you use controls whether the color applies to an object, creates a colored shadow, or places a colored outline around the selected object.

To select a color from the Title Tool Color Picker

1. Select text or another object. If you do not select an object, the color will be applied to the next object you create.

2. Click on one of Color Selection buttons on the Title tool bar: for object, shadow, or outline. The Title Tool Color Picker appears.

To choose a grayscale value, choose a value from the grayscale selection bar.

3. To choose a color:

a. Drag the cursor along the color selection bar to the color you want.

Color selection bar

Shade selection palette

Original Color window

New Color window

Grayscaleselection bar

Eyedropper

Select to openMacintosh Color Picker

Page 121: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

121

b. Continue to hold down the mouse button and move the cursor down into the shade selection palette to choose a shade. The New Color window displays the shade.

The Composer system applies the color to the selected object.

To use the Eyedropper

1. Select text or another object. If you do not select an object, the color will be applied to the next object you create.

2. Click on one of Color Selection buttons on the Title tool bar: for object, shadow, or outline. The Title Tool Color Picker appears.

3. Click on the eyedropper.

The cursor becomes an eyedropper.

4. Click the eyedropper on the color you want to pick up from the window or from any open application on your screen.

The Composer system applies the color to the selected object.

To select a color from the Macintosh Color Picker

The Macintosh Color Picker is a standard application that ships with Macintosh systems. Its appearance varies depending on the current release of the Macintosh Operating System. You can access the Macin-tosh Color Picker through the Title Tool Color Picker as follows.

1. Select text or another object. If you do not select an object, the color will be applied to the next object you create.

2. Click on one of Color Selection buttons on the Title tool bar: for object, shadow, or outline. The Title Tool Color Picker appears.

3. In the window that appears, click the round button under the eye-dropper. The Macintosh Color Picker dialog box appears (see Figure 2-2).

Page 122: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

122

Figure 2-2 Macintosh Color Picker

The Macintosh Color Picker displays the HSL (hue, saturation, light-ness) color wheel by default. You can also choose an RGB (red, green, blue) slider interface by choosing the Apple RGB icon in the upper left-hand corner of the display.

To use the HSL color wheel

1. Drag the color selector to select a color.

2. Drag the brightness slider to make colors brighter or darker.

You can also type in or select color values using the Hue Angle, Satu-ration, and Lightness text boxes and arrows on the right of the dialog box. The Color selector automatically changes position as you change values.

Brightness slider Color wheel

Color value text boxes

Color selector

Page 123: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

123

Blending Two Colors in an Object

You can blend the Þll and border but you can-not blend a shadow.

The Composer system lets you blend two colors in one object or text string. You can also specify the direction of the blend.

To blend two colors

1. Select text or another object.

2. Click on the Color Selection button for either Þll or border.

The blend color selection boxes appear.

3. Click on one of the color selection boxes and choose a color using either the Color Palette, the eyedropper, or the Color Picker.

4. Click on the other color selection box and choose the second color for your blend.

The Blend direction box appears below the two color selection boxes. This box displays the blend and allows you to specify the direction of the blend (for example, left to right).

5. Click in the Blend direction box; hold the mouse button down and drag the cursor clockwise or counterclockwise to achieve the effect you want.

As you rotate the pointer, the position of the two colors rotates as well. The change takes effect as soon as you release the mouse but-ton.

Color selection

Blend Color selection boxes

Blend direction box

Page 124: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

124

Adjusting the Transparency

After you select a color, you can select the color transparency. To do so, click the appropriate transparency button, depending on whether the transparency will apply to an object, or adjust a shadow or outline around the selected object.

The transparency selection box displays the text ÒHiÓ with a back-ground that changes from black to white. A completely white back-ground represents a fully transparent object or portion of an object. The following illustration shows an example:

In the window that appears, move the slider until you attain the trans-parency you desire for the selected object. As you move the sliders, the system immediately applies the transparency to your selection.

n You might Þnd it useful to turn off the shadow for an object while experiment-ing with transparency. Set the shadow value to 0 in the Shadow depth win-dow described in the next section.

Blending Transparency

You can blend the transparency of Þlls and borders by using a tech-nique similar to blending colors. Use the Transparency blend selection boxes to set the blend values. Use the Transparency direction box to set the direction of the blend.

Transparency selection

Transparency blend selection boxes

Transparency direction box

Page 125: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

125

Working with Shadows

You can add a drop shadow or depth shadow to text and objects, and select their color, width, direction, and transparency. The following illustration shows an example of drop and depth shadows:

Use the procedures described in ÒChoosing Colors and Setting Trans-parencyÓ on page 119 to apply color and transparency to shadows.

The following illustration shows the tools used to create and manipu-late shadows:

Page 126: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

126

¥ The Shadow depth selection box indicates the depth of shadow currently in use. The default value is 0. To change the shadow depth, type a new number in this box or select the value and use the up and down arrow keys to change the value.

¥ The Drop and Depth Shadow button toggles between drop and depth shadows.

¥ The Shadow Depth and Direction buttons enables you to change the depth and the direction of the shadow simultaneously.

To apply shadows to objects

1. Select text or an object.

2. Toggle the Drop and Depth Shadow button to select a drop or depth shadow.

3. Click the Shadow Depth and Direction button and drag the cursor around to position the shadow in whatever direction you desire.

4. You can also type a value in the window to change the shadow depth by increments. The current shadow value is displayed.

The Composer system automatically orients the shadow to the selected object. You can continue to follow these procedures to adjust the shadow until you achieve the desired effect.

Shadow Depth selection box Drop and depth shadow button

Shadow Depth and Direction buttons

Page 127: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

127

Saving Text and Drawing Attributes as Title Styles

As you begin to work with a title, you may set up some basic title parameters you will use throughout your work. You can select and set the following style parameters:

¥ Font, style, size, justiÞcation, kerning, and leading

¥ Fill color and transparency

¥ Shadow color, transparency, depth, direction, and type

¥ Border color, transparency, and width

The following illustration shows the two menus that allow you to choose and deÞne title styles:

The Styles tear-off menu displays a visual representation of the avail-able title styles as follows:

The arrows on the right and left of the menu allow you to scroll back and forth within the list if necessary. To choose a style, press the mouse button, drag the cursor to the style and release the button.

Save parameters to a Style sheet

Display and select Styles

Page 128: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

128

To save title parameters to a Style sheet

1. Choose the selection tool so that the cursor becomes an arrow.

2. Select the object that you want to use as a basis for the title style.

3. Click the triangle to the right of the Styles Þeld.

A menu appears that allows you to choose either an existing title style name or Save As.

4. Choose Save As.

The Title Style Sheet dialog box appears. The following illustration shows an example.

5. Check the parameters that you want to include in the style. The Composer system uses the values from the currently selected object or from the current defaults if no object is selected.

6. Enter a name in the text box and click Done when you are ready to exit the dialog box and save the values.

Style Sheet name box

Page 129: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

129

The title style parameters you set will be the default values for future title creation and editing sessions, and will remain in effect until you change them or select another style.

Managing Title Styles

The Composer system lists the available title styles in the Project win-dow. Select the Project window and choose Settings as shown in the following illustration:

To delete a style, select the style in the Project window and press the Delete key or choose Delete from the Edit menu.

Sample Title Styles

Page 130: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

130

To copy a style, select the style in the Project window and choose Duplicate from the Edit menu.

To rename a title style, either change the name in the Project window or perform a Save As operation as described in the topic ÒTo save title parameters to a Style sheetÓ on page 128 and change the name in the Style Sheet text box.

Manipulating Objects

This section describes how to manipulate objects after you have cre-ated them. See ÒThe Selection ToolÓ on page 104 for a description of how to select objects.

Basic Manipulation Operations

You can use commands from the Edit menu to manipulate objects.

Page 131: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

131

To cut an object and move it to the Clipboard

1. Select an object, such as text, a square, a rectangle, a circle, or an oval.

2. Choose Cut from the Edit menu.

Cut removes the object from the screen and places it in the Clip-board.

To copy an object to the Clipboard

1. Select an object.

2. Choose Copy from the Edit menu.

A copy is placed in the Clipboard, replacing the previous Clipboard contents.

Page 132: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

132

To paste an object from the Clipboard

Choose Paste from the Edit menu.

The current Clipboard contents appear in the same location as the object selected for the last Cut or Copy operation. If necessary, move the new object to a new location.

To clear an object

1. Select an object.

2. Choose Clear from the Edit menu. The object is deleted.

n You cannot clear locked objects or groups. Unlock or ungroup objects you want to clear.

To duplicate an object

1. Select an object.

2. Choose Duplicate from the Edit menu or press Option and drag the object to duplicate it.

This creates an exact duplicate of the object.

To select all objects

Choose Select All from the Edit menu. All objects are selected.

To move an object

1. Click the Selection tool.

2. Click and hold the object.

3. Drag the object to a new location, then release the mouse button.

Page 133: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

133

To resize an object

1. Select an object.

2. Click a selection handle and drag to resize the object, then release the mouse button.

Resizing a text box doesnÕt resize the text itself; however it can cause the text to be repositioned.

n Hold down the Shift key and drag a corner to maintain the objectÕs propor-tions while resizing.

To delete an object

1. Select an object.

2. Press the Delete key or choose Delete from the Edit menu.

The object is deleted.

Grouping, Locking, and Layering Objects

You can use commands from the Object menu to group, lock, or layer objects.

Page 134: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

134

Grouping

After creating a number of individual objects, you can group the objects and treat them as a single object. For example, shapes and text can be combined to create a logo. Combining the objects into a group means that actions, such as moving or coloring, affect all objects in the group.

To group objects

1. Click the Selection tool.

2. Either Shift-click multiple objects or press the mouse button and drag the cursor to draw a selection box around the objects.

3. Choose Group from the Object menu.

Page 135: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

135

The selected objects are grouped together. Changes to any individ-ual object in the group affect all objects in the group.

To ungroup objects

1. Select a grouped object.

2. Choose UnGroup from the Object menu.

Everything in the group becomes an individual object that you can move or change separately.

Locking and Unlocking Objects

You can lock objects so that changes to default settings, such as the font setting or object position, do not affect the locked objects. You may also want to lock objects so that you do not inadvertently change them while working on other objects. You can lock an individual object or multiple objects. Locked objects can be displayed in normal mode as well as Preview mode.

To lock objects

1. Select an object.

2. Choose Lock from the Object menu.

The object is locked and cannot be changed until you unlock it.

To unlock objects

1. Select a locked object.

2. Choose Unlock from the Object menu.

The object is unlocked and can be changed.

Page 136: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

136

Layering Text and Objects

You can use the commands on the Object menu to layer text and objects to create complex graphics. The last object created occupies the top layer, but you can move objects forward or backward within the screen area.

To bring an object to the front of the screen

1. Select an object that is underneath another object.

2. Choose Bring To Front from the Object menu.

The selected object moves to the front of the screen.

To send an object to the back of the screen

1. Select an object that is in front of another object.

2. Choose Send To Back from the Object menu.

The selected object moves to the back of the screen.

To move an object forward one layer

1. Select an object.

2. Choose Bring Forward from the Object menu.

The selected object moves forward one layer in the screen.

To move an object backward one layer

1. Select an object.

2. Choose Send Backward from the Object menu.

The selected object moves back one layer in the screen.

Page 137: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

137

Aligning Objects

You can use the Alignment menu commands to align text and objects to each other and to the frame.

To align objects to each other

1. Click the Selection tool.

2. Select more than one object.

3. Choose an alignment direction from the Alignment menu.

n The horizontal and vertical centers are based on objects selected.

Page 138: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

138

To align objects to the frame

Choose this option to align objects within the Safe Title area. For infor-mation about the safe title area, see ÒSaving TitlesÓ on page 139.

1. Click the Selection tool.

2. Select multiple objects.

3. Choose a frame alignment direction from the Alignment menu.

The objects are aligned within the safe title area.

To align objects to a grid

The following selections on the Alignment menu help you to position text and objects. The grid does not appear when you save the graphic.

¥ Visible Grid: Displays the grid

¥ Snap to Grid: Enables the grid to help you to position and connect objects

When you create objects after setting Snap to Grid, they will snap to the nearest grid line. The snap grid has four lines for each line in the visible grid.

Page 139: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

139

Saving Titles

There are three basic ways to work with titles:

1. Create a new title by choosing New Title from the Clip menu.

2. Edit an existing title by Control-double-clicking a title effect icon in a bin.

3. Edit an existing title that is in a sequence.

The main different between the three methods is that you can use Save As for the Þrst two but cannot use Save As for the third method. This section describes the methods for saving a title.

Saving New Titles and Titles You Open from a Bin

If you selected New Title from the Clip menu to create a new title or Control-double-clicked the title effect icon in the bin, use this proce-dure to save the title.

To save a title

1. Choose Save Title on the File menu. A dialog box appears.

2. Enter a title name to identify the title in the bin; then choose a bin, target disk, and AVR from the pop-up menus. Click OK.

Title name

Page 140: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

140

3. Choose one of the following actions:

¥ To exit the Title tool, see ÒExiting the Title ToolÓ on page 143.

¥ To create multiple new titles without exiting the Title tool, see the following section.

n When you edit the title into the sequence, the title name you enter appears in the Title Effect segment in the Timeline.

When you exit the Title tool, the new title is loaded into the Source window. A 2 minute Title Effect clip that corresponds to the new title appears in the bin.

Creating Additional Titles

This section describes two methods for creating additional titles when you have used the New Title command on the Clip menu to create the title or when you are editing an existing title in a bin. These methods are helpful if you want to use some or all of the current text, color, shadow, transparency, and background settings. For example, you might only want to change the titleÕs words and retain all the other set-tings.

You can use either of the following two methods to create additional titles:

¥ Method 1: Leave the current new title in the Title Tool window and use it to create another title. Choose Save Title from the File menu to save your changes. A new title clip with your changes appears in the bin. The name of the Þrst title you saved is given to all the new titles you create. In the bin, add a comment next to each title to indicate the difference between the titles. If you choose Save Title As from the File menu you can select a new name for each new title.

¥ Method 2: Choose New Title from the File menu to clear the cur-rent new title from the Title Tool window.

Page 141: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

141

Saving a Title in a Sequence

If you opened the Title tool by clicking the Other Options button in the Effect mode window and changed an existing title, use one of the fol-lowing procedures to save the title.

n If you opened the Title tool from Effect mode, you cannot create a new title. You can only change the current title.

To save an existing title:

1. Choose Save Title from the File menu.

A dialog box appears.

2. Click OK to save the title and exit the Title tool.

This creates a new media Þle for the title, closes the Title tool, saves the title changes in the Title segment, and places the changed title image in the Record monitor in the Effect mode win-dow.

n The changed Title Effect clip is not saved in the bin. It is only saved in the Title Effect segment in the sequence. If you want to use this Title Effect in another sequence or again in the current sequence, you will have to save it in a bin, as described in the next step.

Page 142: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

142

3. To save the Title Effect clip in a bin, drag the Title Effect icon from the Effect mode window to the desired bin.

You can load the title at any time into the Source window and edit it elsewhere in the sequence.

Exporting a Title as a PICT File

You can export a title in PICT Þle format.

1. Choose Export Title from the File menu.

A dialog box appears.

2. Select the folder for the location where you want to export the Þle, enter a Þle name, and click Save.

The title is saved as a PICT Þle.

Title Effect icon

Page 143: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

143

Exiting the Title Tool

The procedures for exiting the Title tool depend on whether you entered the Title tool from Source/Record mode (new title) or from Effect mode (existing title).

To exit the Title tool after creating a new title

1. Choose Close from the File menu.

2. If you have not saved the new title, a dialog box appears.

Choose one of the following actions:

¥ To save the title and exit the Title tool, enter a title name, choose a bin and target disk from the pop-up menus, and click OK.

¥ To exit the Title tool without saving the title, click DonÕt Save.

This returns you to Source/Record mode. If you saved a title, it appears in the Source window.

To exit the Title tool after changing an existing title

1. Choose Close on the File menu.

2. If you have made a change to the title but have not saved it, a dia-log box appears.

Title name

Page 144: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

144

Choose one of the following actions:

¥ To exit the Title tool without saving the title, click DonÕt Save.

¥ To close the dialog and return to the title tool, click Cancel.

¥ To save the title and exit the Title tool click Save.

This creates a new media Þle for the title, closes the Title tool, saves the title changes in the Title segment, and places the changed title image in the Record monitor in the Effect mode window.

n When you choose Save, the changed Title Effect clip is not saved in the bin. It is only saved in the Title Effect segment in the sequence. If you want to use this Title Effect in another sequence or again in the current sequence, you will have to save it in a bin, as described in the next step.

3. To save the Title Effect clip in a bin, drag the Title Effect icon from the Effect mode window to the desired bin.

Title Effect icon

Page 145: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

145

Editing a Title into a Sequence

After you have created a title with the Title tool, there are two methods you can use to edit the title into your sequence:

¥ Method 1: Add a new video track, load the title into the Source window, mark an IN point and an OUT point, and splice/over-write the title into the sequence.

¥ Method 2: In Segment mode, drag the Title Effect clip from the bin to an existing segment in the Timeline between the edit points.

You edit Titles into a sequence by using the same editing procedures you use for video. The only difference is that if you want to key the title over video, you must add a new video track.

To add a new video track

1. If you have not already done so, load the sequence into the Record monitor.

2. Choose New Video Track on the Clip menu or press k-Y.

The system adds the next video track for the sequence to the Timeline. For example, if the sequence includes only V1, the system adds V2.

n If you apply a title directly to a video clip on the main video track (for exam-ple, V1), the title replaces the video clip, and the titleÕs video background is replaced by a black background.

To edit a title over video

1. If the Title you created is not in the Source window, drag the title effect clip icon there from the bin.

n To replace the Title Effect icon temporarily with a frame from the title clip, click the Title Effect icon and press the Home key or End key on the keyboard. This feature is helpful if you have multiple titles in a bin.

Page 146: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

146

2. On the top video track in the Timeline (for example, V2), click the Record monitorÕs Track Selector and Monitor Selector. Deselect the remaining Record monitor video and audio tracks.

3. Drag the Source windowÕs Track Selector to the Record monitorÕs Track Selector.

n You can use any 3-point editing method to edit a title into a sequence. The steps below are just one editing method. Refer to the UserÕs Guide for other methods.

4. In the Source window, set the mark IN position.

n You should set the mark IN position toward the middle of the title clip, so you can trim the title, if necessary.

5. In the Record monitor, set the mark IN and mark OUT positions.

6. Click either the Splice or Overwrite button to edit the title into the sequence.

This adds the title effect segment to the top video track.

Track SelectorMonitor Selector

Record Monitor

Source Monitor Track Selector

Overwrite buttonSplice button

Page 147: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

147

n After you create a title with a particular video format (PAL or NTSC), if you want to create a title for a project using the other video format, you must exit and restart the Composer system.

To drag the Title Effect Icon into the Timeline

To edit the title into a sequence, you can also use the Add Edit button to add an empty segment to the top video track, and then drag the Title effect from the bin directly to the empty segment on the Timeline.

1. Use the Add Edit button to identify the begin and end points for the title. (Deselect other tracks before using the Add Edit button so you only add the edit marks where they are needed.)

2. Click the Segment Mode button to enter Segment mode

Title Effect segment in the Timeline

Add Editbutton

Add Edit marks

Segment Mode button

Page 148: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

148

3. Place the blue Position indicator line between the edit marks and choose the Mark Clip button to mark IN and OUT points.

4. Click the Title effect icon in the bin and drag it over the marked segment.

n Hold the k key down while dragging the icon over the Timeline so the icon will snap to the clip boundaries.

The following illustration shows the title edited into the Timeline:

To fade the title up or down, see ÒFading a TitleÓ on page 151.

Mark Clipbutton

Page 149: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

149

Editing an Existing Title

You can use the Title tool to change an existing titleÕs text and graphic objects. There are two ways to edit an existing title:

¥ Control-double-click the title effect icon in the bin. See ÒSaving New Titles and Titles You Open from a BinÓ on page 139.

¥ If the title is in a sequence you can edit the title in the sequence.

To change a title in a sequence

1. In Source/Record mode, select the track on which the title effect is located by clicking the track selector (for example, V2) in the Time-line.

2. Place the blue position indicator on the title effect in the Timeline.

3. Click the Effect Mode button.

The Effect Mode window appears.

4. Click the Other Options button.

Other Options button

Page 150: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

150

The Title tool window appears. Edit the title as described earlier in this chapter.

For information on saving the edited title, see ÒSaving a Title in a SequenceÓ on page 141.

Removing Titles

After you have edited a title into a sequence, use these procedures if you want to remove the Title effect, its segment, and/or its video track.

To remove the title segment

1. Click either the yellow Extract/Splice-in arrow or the red Lift/Overwrite arrow at the bottom of the Timeline window to enter Segment mode.

2. Select the title segment and press the Delete key twice to delete the Title effect and its alpha channel media Þle.

To remove only the Title effect

1. In Source/Record mode, click the Track Selector in the Timeline for the track on which the title appears.

2. Place the blue Position indicator on the Title effect in the Timeline.

3. Click the Remove Effect button either on the Fast menu or in the row of buttons below the Record monitor.

This removes the Title effect from the segment. The alpha channel media Þle remains.

n The title effect remains in the bin. To remove the title effect from the bin, high-light the effect in the bin and press the Delete key.

Page 151: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

151

Fading a Title

You can use the Fade Title button to fade a title quickly and easily. A dialog box appears that allows you to enter the number of frames to fade up and fade down.

When you select the Fade Title feature, the system fades all selected title segments. If you do not select any title segments, the system attempts to Þnd a title at the current position on the selected tracks.

The Fade Title feature automatically creates key frames for the title segment. You can access the key frames in Effect mode.

c The Fade Title function removes all existing key frames in the title and inserts new key frames.

To fade a title

1. With a sequence in the Record monitor, select the track where the title segment is located.

2. To fade a single title, move the blue Position indicator in the Time-line to the title segment.

To fade multiple titles in a sequence, click either the yellow arrow or red arrow at the bottom of the Timeline window to enter Seg-ment mode, hold down the Shift key, and click the desired title segments in the Timeline.

3. Click the Fast menu button.

4. Select the Fade Title button from the Fast menu.

n The Fade Title function only changes the Title clip in the Timeline. If you want to save the change as an Effect Template, in Effect mode, drag the Title icon to the bin.

Page 152: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

152

5. In the dialog box that appears, enter the number of frames to fade up and fade down and click OK.

This fades the selected titles. You can immediately view the fade effect by playing the title segment.

The following is an example of a faded title in Effect mode. The key frames were added automatically based on the number of frames you selected.

Page 153: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

153

For more information about Effect mode, see ÒWorking in Effect ModeÓ on page 45.

Titles and Their Related Files

When a title is saved, a title clip and two associated media Þles are cre-ated. The Composer system creates a 2 minute long title clip and saves it in the selected bin. One media object, referred to as a precompute, has references to the RGB and alpha channel media Þles.

Media Þles are saved on the media volume you select. Every time you make a change to a title effect, the Composer system creates two addi-tional media Þles. The original media Þles are left unchanged.

Key Frame indicator in the effect’s TimelineLevel slider shows transparency at each point in the Timeline

Page 154: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

154

n You can view rendered effects in the bin by choosing Set Bin Display from the Bin menu and by selecting Rendered Effects. By default, the bin display does not show rendered effects. A rendered effect is shown here to differentiate between it and the Title Effect clip.

For more information about media Þles, see ÒManaging Your Media FilesÓ on page 91.

Title Effect clip Rendered Effect media object (precompute)

Media Volume

RGB andalpha channelmedia files

Bin – Frame View

Rendered Effect media object(precompute)

Bin – Text View

Title Effect clip

Media Volume

RGB and alpha channel media files

Page 155: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

155

Displaying the Aspect Ratio Grid for Film

The Aspect Ratio Grid displays several guidelines to show you where you can crop the top or bottom of your frame to achieve the Òletter-boxÓ effect. The guidelines represent the standard mask ratios of pro-jected Þlm: 1.66, 16x9, 1.85, and 2.35. Use this feature to determine if an undesired element should be seen during screening, if you should use an alternate take, or if a resize is required.

You can display the Aspect Ratio Grid in Effect mode or in Source/Record mode.

To actually apply a mask, you would select one of the Film masks from the Effect Palette. For more information about applying effects, see Chapter 1.

To display the Aspect Ratio Grid in Effect Mode

1. With a title in the Effect Preview monitor, hold the Option key and click the Save Title/Action button.

1.6616x9

1.85

2.35

2.35

1.85

16x9

1.66

Film Mask aspect ratios

Page 156: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

156

To display the Aspect Ratio Grid in Source/Record Mode

2. With a sequence in the Record monitor, click the Fast menu button located in the middle of the Composer window and also above the Record monitor.

3. Hold down the Option key and select the Safe Title/Action button from the Fast menu.

The Aspect Ratio Grid appears in the Record monitor.

Changing Existing Titles to Real Time

You can use the Recreate Title Media command to change the Avid Video Resolution (AVR) of the title. If you have batch digitized a sequence at a resolution different from the resolution at which the sequence was originally created, you can use this command to recreate the titles at the resolution you specify in the Compression setting.

You can also use the Recreate Title Media command on the Clip menu to change titles created in Release 5.03 through 5.10 to real-time titles without having to open the Title tool and render them.

n The Recreate Title Media command removes any nested edits made inside of a title, replacing the edits with the new titleÕs graphic and alpha tracks.

To change existing titles to real time

1. Load the sequence containing the non-real-time titles into the Record monitor.

2. Mark the IN and OUT points in the sequence.

n You can regenerate multiple titles at the same time by enclosing a series of titles within the mark IN and OUT points, then selecting all the tracks in the sequence on which the titles are located.

Page 157: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

157

3. Select the tracks where the title is located.

n The Recreate Title Media command uses the current Compression tool set-tings. Check these settings prior to using the Recreate Title Media command.

4. Choose Recreate Title Media from the Clip menu.

When the task is completed, the indicator in the Title Effect icon changes to orange and the selected titles change to a real-time titles.

Restrictions of Real-Time Titles

If your Composer system has real-time titles, you should be aware of the following restrictions:

¥ You cannot reposition or resize a real-time title in Effect mode. If you do, the title will no longer be real time. You will have to ren-der it before you can play it.

¥ All titles created prior to Release 5.11 will not be real-time titles until you modify them using the Title tool or regenerate them using the Recreate Title Media command on the Clip menu.

Page 158: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

158

¥ You can have only one real-time effect in a video frame at a time. If you want to overlap titles on different layers, you must render one or more of those layers Ñ either all lower layers or just the top layer.

¥ You can use imported PICT Þles that contain alpha channels as real-time matte keys.

Several factors can add to the complexity of a title: the text size and amount, drop shadows, or overlapping, high-contrast colors. Depend-ing on the complexity of the title and the video it is keyed over, not all titles can be played in real time. When you attempt to play too com-plex a title in real time, the following conditions might occur:

¥ Background video might jitter

¥ Title might ßash

¥ Title might display a gray slide

¥ Video might shift left or right

¥ Video might display a gray slide

¥ Vista missed frame advance error might occur

¥ Video underrun error might occur

¥ Audio underrun error might occur

If you encounter any of these conditions, try rendering the title, or sim-plify the title by removing text or drop shadows or by selecting differ-ent colors.

It is possible that the combination of the title and background video can be so complex that you can neither play it in real time nor render it.

It is also possible that you cannot play rendered titles because the resulting frames are too large. You can control the size of titles by using the projectÕs Render settings. See ÒRendering an EffectÓ on page 65 for an explanation of the Render settings.

Page 159: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

159

CHAPTER 3

2D Effects Reference

For information on editing an effect into a sequence, see Chapter 1.

Effect Categories

In this chapter, each effect is grouped alphabetically within its Effect Category, as follows:

¥ Blend effects

¥ Conceal effects

¥ Film effects

¥ Image effects

¥ Key effects

¥ L-Conceal effects

¥ Motion effects

¥ Peel effects

¥ Push effects

¥ Spin effects

¥ Squeeze effects

¥ Wipe effects (Box Wipes, Edge Wipes, Matrix Wipes, Saw Tooth Wipes, Shape Wipes)

Page 160: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

160

If you install third-party plug-in effects that are compatible with Adobe Photoshop Version 2.01 or greater, those effect categories will appear in the Effect Palette. For information on installing third-party plug-in effects, see ÒInstalling Third-Party Plug-In EffectsÓ on page 19.

2D Effect Parameters

Each effect has parameters that control its visual display. This section provides a general description of 2D parameters. If there is informa-tion about a parameter that is unique to a speciÞc effect, it is explained in the description of that effect in this chapter.

Some parameters have corresponding 3D versions. The 3D versions are described in Chapter 4.

Effect parameters are grouped in the following categories:

¥ Border Parameters (see 3D version Border)

¥ Color Effect Parameters

¥ Color Selection Parameters

¥ Crop Parameters (see 3D version Crop Ñ Cropping the Image)

¥ Key Control Parameters (see 3D version Foregnd Ñ Selecting Between Full, Chroma, and Luma Keys)

¥ Matrix Parameters

¥ Motion Effect Parameters

¥ Position and Size Parameters

¥ Rate Control Parameters

¥ Reverse Parameter

¥ Transition Parameters

Page 161: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

161

The effect parameters speciÞc to the Color, Motion, and Freeze Frame effects are included in their effect descriptions.

For an explanation of how to change a parameter, see ÒChanging a ParameterÓ on page 50.

n If a parameter name is abbreviated in the Effect mode window, the abbrevia-tion is shown in this section in parentheses.

Border Parameters

Many effects allow you to place a border on the inner or incoming pic-ture in the effect. The Border parameters allow you to specify the soft-ness and width of the border. ÒColor Selection ParametersÓ on page 162, explains how to set the color for the border and create a bor-der blend.

Border Width

Border Width speciÞes the width of the border. Values range from 0 (no border) to 63 (widest border).

Border Softness (Soft)

Border Softness blends the border with the background image, giving the border a soft appearance. Values range from 0 (no softness) to 63 (maximum softness).

n If your system has the 3D Effects option, see ÒEffects with 2D and 3D Ver-sionsÓ on page 314.

Page 162: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

162

Color Effect Parameters

For an explanation of the parameters listed below, see ÒColor EffectÓ on page 201.

¥ Brightness (Bright)

¥ Clip

¥ Color Gain Ð Red, Green, and Blue

¥ Contrast (Cont)

¥ Hue

¥ Invert

¥ Posterization (Poster)

¥ Saturation (Sat)

¥ Solarization (Solar)

Color Selection Parameters

The Color Selection parameters are used to set the color for the follow-ing areas of an image:

¥ Border Color Ð The color of the border for the inner or incoming image.

¥ Border Blend Ð A second color to be blended in the border. Border Blend is only available on non-real-time effects.

¥ Background Color Ð The color for the background in effects that display a background.

¥ Fade Color Ð The color to be used in a Fade To Color, Fade From Color, or Dip To Color effect.

¥ Key Color Ð The color to be replaced with video in a Chroma Key effect.

Page 163: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

163

To access all parameters that can be colored for an effect, in Effect mode click the Fast menu to the left of the current parameterÕs name. The following example is from a Box Wipe effect.

The following Color parameters can be set using the sliders; or you can use the Eyedropper tool to select a color from the video in the Effect Preview monitor.

Hue

Hue identiÞes the color. The Hue parameter is measured as values on a color wheel ranging from 0 to 255. The start (0) and ending (255) val-ues are both red.

Saturation (Sat)

Saturation speciÞes the amount or intensity of the color. Values range from 0 to 255, where 0 is no chrominance and 255 is a fully saturated color.

Luminance (Lum)

Luminance speciÞes the brightness of the color. Values range from 0 to 255, where 0 is black and 255 is full brightness or white.

Click Fast menu to select other parameters from pop-up menu.

Move the mouse to the Color Preview win-dow to activate the Eyedropper.

Color Selection parameters

Page 164: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

164

n If your system has the 3D Effects option, see ÒEffects with 2D and 3D Ver-sionsÓ on page 314.

Crop Parameters

The Crop parameters remove video from the top, bottom, left, and right edges of the video. Cropping is available on the following effects: Picture-In-Picture, Resize, Chroma Key, and Luma Key.

n Cropping is only available if your Composer system has an Advanced JPEG compression board and, on some systems, a Mandrill DVE daughter board.

The Crop parameters are accessed by clicking the Fast menu next to the Picture parametersÕ group name.

Top

Removes video from the top of the inner or incoming video. Values range from 0 to 999. 0 is the top of the screen; 500 is the middle of the screen; and 999 is the bottom of the screen.

Fast menu

Page 165: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

165

Bottom

Removes video from the bottom of the inner or incoming video. Val-ues range from Ð999 to 0. 0 is the bottom of the screen; Ð500 is the mid-dle of the screen; and Ð999 is the top of the screen.

Left

Removes video from the left side of the inner or incoming video. Val-ues range from 0 to 999. 0 is the left side; 500 is the middle; and 999 is the right side.

Right

Removes video from the right side of the inner or incoming video. Val-ues range from Ð999 to 0. 0 is the right side; Ð500 is the middle; and -999 is the left side.

n If your system has the 3D Effects option, see ÒEffects with 2D and 3D Ver-sionsÓ on page 314.

Key Control Parameters

Key Control parameters appear only in Key effects (Chroma and Luma), and control the amount of video replacement and the border blending for the keys.

Gain

The Gain parameter speciÞes how much of the foreground and the background video will be displayed. Values range from 0 to 63. A Gain

Page 166: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

166

of 0 shows only the foreground. A Gain of 63 replaces all of the fore-ground video with the background video.

Softness (Soft)

The Softness parameter determines how the bordering colors along the edge of the key are processed in the effect. Colors that border the luminance or chroma speciÞed for the key are displayed as a blend of the foreground and the background video. The higher the Softness value, the more of the background video will be blended in the border colors. Use the Softness slider to improve the appearance of the edges of the keyed areas.

Matrix Parameters

Matrix effects are effects that use a grid to deÞne the position or progress of the effect over time. The Matrix parameters deÞne the grid to be used in the effect.

To view or modify these parameters, click the Other Options button in the Effect mode window.

The matrix effectÕs dialog box appears.

Other Options button

Page 167: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

167

You can select a standard grid or enter a custom number of rows and columns. The minimum number of rows and columns is 2 x 2.

Columns

Number of columns in the effect.

Rows

Number of rows in the effect.

Motion Effect Parameters

ee ÒMotion EffectsÓ on page 225 for an explanation of the following parameters:

¥ Duration

¥ Strobe Motion Update Rate

¥ Two Field Media

¥ Variable Speed

Columns Rows

Graphicalrepresentationof the grid

Page 168: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

168

Position and Size Parameters

The Fixed Aspect parameter determines which position and size parameters are displayed. When the Fixed Aspect parameter is enabled, the aspect ratio of the picture cannot be changed; and the Width and Height parametersÕ sliders are replaced with a Size param-eter slider.

Fixed Aspect

Horizontal Position (H Pos)

Moves the video from side to side. Values range from Ð999 to 999. Neg-ative values move the image to the left. Positive values move the image to the right.

Vertical Position (V Pos)

Moves the video up and down. Values range from Ð999 to 999. Nega-tive values move the image to the top. Positive values move the image to the bottom.

Width

Controls the width of the image when the Fixed Aspect parameter is disabled. Values range from 0 to 400.

Fixed Aspect is enabled; Width changes to Size and Height is disabled.

Fixed Aspect is disabled.

Page 169: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

169

Height

Controls the height of the image when the Fixed Aspect parameter is disabled. Values range from 0 to 400.

Size

ModiÞes the size of the inner or incoming video when the Fixed Aspect parameter is enabled. Values range from 0 to 400.

n If your system has the 3D Effects option, see ÒEffects with 2D and 3D Ver-sionsÓ on page 314.

Position and Size Parameters for Blowup Effects

The Blowup effect in the Film Composer system uses the following parameters to set the effectÕs position and size:

Field

The Field parameter controls the size of the image. A Field of 1 leaves the image size unchanged, and a Þeld of 10 increases the image to the maximum size.

X Position (X Pos)

The X Position slider allows you to position the image horizontally on the screen. The X Position varies on a scale of West 20 to East 20, where 0 is unchanged. This matches the description in the Cut List.

Page 170: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

170

Y Position (Y Pos)

The Y Position slider allows you to position the image vertically on the screen. The Y Position varies on a scale of North 20 to South 20, where 0 is unchanged. This matches the description in the Cut List.

Rate Control Parameters

The Rate Control parameters are used in conjunction with key frames to set the rate and amount of the effect over time.

Acceleration

Acceleration adjusts the effectÕs speed over time by having the effect ease in and ease out. This gives the effect a more natural appearance. The Acceleration parameter applies to the entire effect, not to speciÞc key frames.

Some sample Acceleration settings are as follows:

This is a graphical representation of the rate at which the effect will occur.

Use the Acceleration and Level slid-ers to adjust the rate and amount of the effect over time.

Page 171: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

171

The overall speed of an effect is determined by the duration of the effect, which is determined by the length of the clip in the sequence. If you want to slow down or speed up the movement of an effect, you will need to change the length of your sequence; or use add edits to limit the portion of the clip affected by the effect.

Level

The Level parameter is used, together with key frames, to set the rela-tive amount of the effect to be displayed over time. The Level parame-ter performs differently depending on the effect.

For Blend and Key effects, the Level parameter represents the outgo-ing effectÕs opacity. A Level of 100 is 100 percent transparent, a Level of 50 is 50 percent transparent, and a Level of 0 is 100 percent opaque.

For Wipes and all other transition effects (except Dissolves) the Level parameter represents the proportion of incoming frames to outgoing frames. A Level of 0 is 100 percent of outgoing, a Level of 50 is 50 per-cent of outgoing, and a Level of 100 is 0 percent of outgoing.

Dissolve effects are a special case, where the Level parameter repre-sents both the effectÕs opacity and the proportion of incoming to out-going frames.

Setting Result

0 Linear acceleration

50 Slight ease in and ease out

100 Maximum ease in and ease out

Page 172: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

172

Reverse Parameter

The Reverse parameter reverses the effectÕs pattern for transition effects, and reverses the background and foreground for key effects. Not all effects can be reversed.

To reverse an effect, click the Reverse Effect button at the top of the Effect mode window.

When the arrow on the button is pointing right, the effect is played normally. When the arrow is pointing left, the effect is played in reverse.

Transition Parameters

The Transition parameters appear below the Effect parameters in Effect mode, and appear below the Source monitor in Trim mode.

Relative Position

The Relative Position parameters specify the start of the transition effect relative to the cut point in the sequence. Click the button to the left of the Duration parameter, and select a position from the Relative Position pop-up menu:

¥ Ending at Cut Ð The transition effect will start a number of frames before the cut deÞned by the duration, such that the effect com-pletes at the cut point in the video.

Click the Relative Position button to select a position from the pop-up menu.

Duration

Page 173: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

173

¥ Centered at Cut Ð The transition will be centered on the cut so that half the effect will occur before the cut point and half will occur after the cut point in the sequence.

¥ Starting at Cut Ð The transition effect will start immediately after the last frame of the outgoing video is displayed.

¥ Custom Start Ð Allows you to specify the number of frames before and after the cut to be included in the effect.

Duration

The Duration parameter speciÞes the length of time that the effect will span the transition. The duration of a segment effect is determined by the length of the segment. The Duration format that is displayed (for example, 1:00 is one second and 0 frames) is determined by the Dura-tion setting you selected at the top of the Source/Record mode win-dow.

n For more information about using transition effects, see ÒWorking with Transition EffectsÓ on page 38.

Blend Effects

Blend effects are general two-channel effects. They include:

¥ Dip To Color

¥ Dissolve

¥ Fade From Color

¥ Fade To Color

¥ Picture-In-Picture

¥ Superimpose

n If your system has the 3D Effects option, see ÒGetting Familiar with the InterfaceÓ on page 311 for a description of the 3D Warp effect.

Page 174: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

174

Dip To Color

Effect Category Blend

Apply to Transitions

Parameters Transition Ð relative position and duration

Color Selection Ð Fade Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible No

Description Fades from the outgoing video to black, white, or any color and then fades up to the incoming video. Color is speciÞed using the luminance, chroma, and saturation sliders.

Dip To Color effect Image dips to white

Incoming videoOutgoing video

Page 175: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

175

Dissolve

There are three ways to add a Dissolve effect:

¥ In Source/Record mode or in Effect mode, drag the Dissolve effect from the Blend Effect Palette to the transition in the Timeline.

¥ In Trim mode or Effect mode, type a duration in the Transition Duration parameter.

¥ In Source/Record mode or in Trim mode, click the Quick Dissolve button.

Effect Category Blend

Apply to Transitions

Parameters Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible No

Description Blends images from the outgoing video with the incoming video over time.

Page 176: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

176

Fade From Color

Dissolve effect

Incoming video Outgoing video

Effect Category Blend

Apply to Transitions

Parameters Transition Ð relative position and duration

Color Selection Ð Fade Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Fades from black, white, or any color to the incom-ing video.

Page 177: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

177

Fade To Color

Effect Category Blend

Apply to Transitions

Parameters Color Selection Ð Fade Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Fades from the outgoing video to black, white, or any color.

Page 178: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

178

Picture-In-Picture

Effect Category Blend

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Crop Ð left, right, top, and bottom

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Position and Size Ð horizontal position, vertical position, size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible No

Description Creates a picture within a picture. Video from the higher layer, where the effect is applied, is dis-played inside the video on the lower layer. When used on a transition, the incoming video appears inside outgoing video.

Specify the size, location, and movement of the included picture using the Position and Size parameters together with key frames.

Crop the inner picture by selecting Crop on the Pic-ture parameterÕs Fast menu, and setting the top, bottom, left, and right sliders.

Specify a border for the inner picture using Border Width, Border Softness, and Border Color.

Page 179: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

179

Picture-In-Picture effect

Video layer 2Video layer 1

Page 180: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

180

Superimpose

Effect Category Blend

Apply to Multilayer segments

Parameters Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible No

Description Blends the image from the upper video track (where the effect is applied) with the image from the lower video track over time. Level set at 100 percent shows only the video image from the upper track where the effect is applied. Level set at 0 per-cent shows only the video image from the lower video track.

Superimpose effect

Video layer 2Video layer 1

Page 181: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

181

Conceal Effects

Conceal effects overlap one video channel over another video channel using a predeÞned path. They include:

¥ Bottom Left to Top Right

¥ Bottom Right to Top Left

¥ Bottom to Top

¥ Left to Right

¥ Right to Left

¥ Top Left to Bottom Right

¥ Top Right to Bottom Left

¥ Top to Bottom

For an example of a Conceal effect, see ÒTop Left to Bottom RightÓ on page 187.

For examples of similar effects, see ÒComparison of Similar EffectsÓ on page 308.

Page 182: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

182

Bottom Left to Top Right

Effect Category Conceal

Apply to Transitions, single-layer and multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The outgoing video slides on top of the incoming video from the bottom left to the top right of the screen.

Page 183: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

183

Bottom Right to Top Left

Effect Category Conceal

Apply to Transitions, single-layer and multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The outgoing video slides on top of the incoming video from the bottom right to the top left of the screen.

Page 184: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

184

Bottom to Top

Effect Category Conceal

Apply to Transitions, single-layer and multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video slides on top of the outgoing video from the bottom to the top of the screen.

Page 185: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

185

Left to Right

Effect Category Conceal

Apply to Transitions, single-layer and multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video slides on top of the outgoing video from the left edge to the right edge of the screen.

Page 186: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

186

Right to Left

Effect Category Conceal

Apply to Transitions, single-layer and multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video slides on top of the outgoing video from the right edge to the left edge of the screen.

Page 187: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

187

Top Left to Bottom Right

Effect Category Conceal

Apply to Transitions, single-layer and multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video slides on top of the outgoing video from the top left corner to the bottom right cor-ner of the screen.

Conceal effect

Incoming videoOutgoing video

Page 188: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

188

n For examples of similar effects, seeÒComparison of Similar EffectsÓ on page 308.

Top Right to Bottom Left

Effect Category Conceal

Apply to Transitions, single-layer and multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video slides on top of the outgoing video from the top right corner of the screen to the bottom left corner of the screen.

Page 189: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

189

Top to Bottom

Effect Category Conceals

Apply to Transitions, single-layer and multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video slides on top of the outgoing video from the top of the screen to the bottom of the screen.

Page 190: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

190

Film Effects

Film effects emulate many of the effects an optical house can produce. They include:

¥ 1:1.66 Mask

¥ 1:1.85 Mask

¥ 1:2.35 Mask

¥ 16 x 9 Mask

¥ Blowup

¥ Film Dissolve

¥ Film Fade

¥ Mask

n Film effects are only available on Media Composer systems with Film Option and on Film Composer systems.

Page 191: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

191

1:1.66 Mask

Effect Category Film

Apply to Single-layer segments

Parameters Position and Size Ð horizontal position, vertical posi-tion, size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Reversible No

Description Masks out any area of the image that is not inside a centered rectangle. The centered rectangle is 1.66 times wider than it is tall. The area surrounding the rectangle is masked by a black background.

Horizontal and Vertical Position sliders move the position of the mask on the picture.

Size, Height, and Width sliders change the size of the mask.

Page 192: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

192

1:1.85 Mask

Effect Category Film

Apply to Single-layer segments

Parameters Position and Size Ð horizontal position, vertical posi-tion, size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Reversible No

Description Masks out any area of the image that is not inside a centered rectangle. The centered rectangle is 1.85 times wider than it is tall. The area surrounding the rectangle is masked by a black background.

Horizontal and Vertical Position sliders move the position of the mask on the picture.

Size, Height, and Width sliders change the size of the mask.

1:1.85 Mask EffectOriginal image

Page 193: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

193

1:2.35 Mask

Effect Category Film

Apply to Single-layer segments

Parameters Position and Size Ð horizontal position, vertical posi-tion, size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Reversible No

Description Masks out any area of the image that is not inside a centered rectangle. The centered rectangle is 2.35 times wider than it is tall. The area surrounding the rectangle is masked by a black background.

Horizontal and Vertical Position sliders move the position of the mask on the picture.

Size, Height, and Width sliders change the size of the mask.

Page 194: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

194

16 x 9 Mask

Effect Category Film

Apply to Single-layer segments

Parameters Position and Size Ð horizontal position, vertical posi-tion, size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Reversible No

Description Masks out any area of the image that is not inside a centered rectangle. The centered rectangle is 16 units wide by 9 units high. The area surrounding the rect-angle is masked by a black background.

Horizontal and Vertical Position sliders move the position of the mask on the picture.

Size, Height, and Width sliders change the size of the mask.

Page 195: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

195

Blowup

Effect Category Film

Apply to Single-layer segments

Parameters Color Selection Ð Background Color Ð hue, satura-tion, and luminance

Position and Size Ð Þeld, X position, and Y position

Reversible No

Description Blowup modiÞes the size and portion of the picture that is displayed.

The X Position varies on a scale of 20 West to 20 East, where 0 leaves the image unchanged.

The Y Position varies on a scale of 20 North to 20 South, where 0 leaves the image unchanged.

The Field slider increases the size of the picture and is set from 0 to 10, where 0 leaves the image unchanged and 10 increases the image to the maxi-mum size.

Blowup EffectOriginal image

Page 196: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

196

Film Dissolve

Effect Category Film

Apply to Transitions

Parameters Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible No

Description Blends the outgoing frame to the incoming frame over time. The Level parameter has been preset according to Kodak speciÞcations. Avid does not rec-ommend adjusting the Level parameter on this effect.

The Level set at 0% shows all of the outgoing frame. The Level set at 100% shows all of the incoming frame.

This dissolve has preset parameters that emulate ÞlmÕs response to light when dissolving to another (nonblack) picture.

Page 197: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

197

Film Dissolve effect

Incoming video Outgoing video

Page 198: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

198

Film Fade

Effect Category Film

Apply to Transitions

Parameters Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible No

Description Blends the outgoing pictures to the incoming pic-tures over time. The Level parameter has been preset according to Kodak speciÞcations. We do not recom-mend adjusting the Level parameter on this effect.

The Level set at 0% shows all of the outgoing frame. The Level set at 100% shows all of the incoming frame.

This dissolve has preset parameters that emulates ÞlmÕs response to black material. Use this effect for fade ins and fade outs.

Page 199: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

199

Mask

Effect Category Film

Apply to Single-layer segments

Parameters Color Selection Ð Background Color Ð hue, satu-ration, and luminance

Position and Size Ð horizontal position, vertical position, size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Reversible No

Description Masks out any area of the image that is not inside a rectangle deÞned by the Scale, Fixed Aspect, and Position parameters of the effect.

The area surrounding this rectangle is masked by the effectÕs Background Color.

Page 200: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

200

Image Effects

Image effects are general effects that apply to a single stream of video. They include:

¥ Color Effect

¥ Flip

¥ Flip Flop

¥ Flop

¥ Mask

¥ Resize

¥ Sub-master

Page 201: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

201

Color Effect

Effect Category Image

Apply to Single-layer segments

Parameters Luminance Ð brightness, contrast, clip, and invert

Chroma Ð hue, saturation, and invert

Style Ð posterization and solarization

Color Gain Ð red, green, and blue

Reversible Both luminance and chroma can be reversed.

Description The Color effect modiÞes the luminance, chroma, style (posterized or solarized), and color gain of the segment.

Color Effect parameters

Page 202: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

202

Luminance (Luma Adjust)

Brightness (Bright)

Brightness changes the brightness of the picture. The Brightness parameter ranges from Ð100 to +100, where a value of zero indicates that the image is unchanged. A value of Ð100 darkens the image; a value of +100 brightens the image.

Contrast (Cont)

Contrast controls the contrast of light and dark areas in the picture. Values range from Ð100 to +100, where a value of zero indicates the image is unchanged. A negative value is less contrast; a positive value is more contrast.

Original – Brightness 0 Brightness Ð50 Brightness +50

Original – Contrast 0 Contrast -50 Contrast +50

Page 203: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

203

Clip

Clip allows you to specify the brightest value that can be displayed. All values above this level are capped at this level. The clip setting var-ies on a scale of 0 to 255, where 255 indicates that all brightness values are displayed, and 0 indicates that only the darkest values are dis-played.

Invert

Invert reverses the imageÕs brightness, such that the brightest parts become the darkest and the darkest parts become the lightest.

Original – Clip 255 Clip 180 Clip 150

Page 204: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

204

Chrominance (Chroma)

Hue

Hue varies the tint of all colors in the image. The Hue parameter is measured as degrees on a color wheel from -180 to +180, where 0 does not change the hue. Changing the value of the Hue causes all colors in the image to rotate around the color spectrum. For example, a Hue set-ting of -20 causes skin tones to look more red, while a Hue setting of +20 causes skin tones to look more green.

Saturation (Sat)

Saturation varies the amount of all colors in the image. The Saturation parameter has a value of -100 to +100. Zero is the default. A value of -100 displays as gray tones. Positive values display all colors with more saturation.

Invert

Invert reverses the colors in both Hue and Saturation such that all col-ors display as their complement.

Page 205: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

205

Style

Posterization (Poster)

Posterization allows you to limit the number of colors in the image by controlling the number of luminance steps that are displayed. This gives the image a graphic appearance. The range of values is 0 to 25, where 0 displays all colors and 25 displays the least number of colors.

Posterization 18Original image

Page 206: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

206

Solarization (Solar)

Solarization allows you to make the lightest points in the image dark to achieve a partial inversion of the luminance. Values above the threshold set for the parameter will be inverted. Solarization can have a value of 0 to 255, where zero is normal luminance and 255 inverts all luminance values in the picture. Values of 0 to 127 display the lightest points in the image as dark. Values of 128 to 255 display both the light-est points dark and the darkest points as light, which gives the appear-ance of overexposed Þlm.

Color Gain

The Color Gain parameters allow individual control of the Color Gain for each of the three color components: red, blue, and green. The value range for each Color Gain parameter is a percentage with a range from 0 to 200, where a value of 100 indicates that the color is unchanged.

Red

Changes the amount of red in the whole image.

Blue

Changes the amount of blue in the whole image.

Green

Changes the amount of green in the whole image.

Original image Solarization 100 Solarization 150

Page 207: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

207

Flip

Flip Flop

Effect Category Image

Apply to Single-layer segments

Parameters Border Ð width

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Reversible No

Description Video image is ßipped vertically.

Effect Category Image

Apply to Single-layer segments

Parameters Border Ð width

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Reversible No

Description Video image is ßipped both horizontally and verti-cally.

Page 208: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

208

Flop

Effect Category Image

Apply to Single-layer segments

Parameters Border Ð width

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Reversible No

Description Video image is ßipped horizontally, which reverses the camera angle.

Flop effectOriginal image

Page 209: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

209

Mask

Effect Category Image

Apply to Single-layer segments

Parameters Color Selection Ð Background Color Ð hue, satura-tion, and luminance

Position and Size Ð horizontal position, vertical position, size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Reversible No

Description Masks out any area of the image that is not inside a rectangle deÞned by the Scale, Fixed Aspect, and Position parameters of the effect. The area sur-rounding the rectangle is masked by the effectÕs Background Color.

Page 210: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

210

Resize

Effect Category Image

Apply to Single-layer segments

Parameters Color Selection Ð Background Color Ð hue, satura-tion, and luminance

Crop Ð top, bottom, left, and right

Position and Size Ð horizontal position, vertical position, size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible No

Description Resize modiÞes the size and position of the video. The Background Color displays where no video is present. Use the Horizontal and Vertical Position and Size sliders to specify the size and position of the video. Use the Crop parameters to remove the edges of the picture.

Original image Resize effect – reduced image Resize effect – enlarged image

Page 211: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

211

Sub-master

n Because the Sub-master effect does not render each track separately, after ren-dering you cannot play each track separately

Effect Category Image

Apply to The top video track under which are the video tracks that will be included in the Sub-master effect.

Parameters None

Reversible No

Description When rendered, the Sub-master effect creates a single media Þle for all the video on the layers below the Sub-master effect. This allows you to group several effects, that reside on different video layers, and render them as one effect which is quicker than rendering each effect sep-arately.

Page 212: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

212

Key Effects

Key effects combine two streams of video using components from one of the streams. They include:

¥ YUV Chroma Key

¥ Luma Key

¥ Matte Key

n If your system has the 3D Effects option, see ÒEffects with 2D and 3D Ver-sionsÓ on page 314.

YUV Chroma Key

Effect Category Key

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Crop Ð top, bottom, left, and right

Color Selection Ð Primary Key, Secondary Key, Spill Suppression Key colors Ð hue, saturation, and lumi-nance

Key Control Ð gain and softness

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Position and Size Ð horizontal position, vertical position, size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes Ñ inverts the key

Page 213: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

213

Description Replaces one part of the video image with another video image based on color. The key color in the video on the higher track is replaced with the video from the lower track number. Chroma key is used most frequently with a foreground image shot in front of a highly saturated color screen.

In the Color Selection parameters, use the primary key color to select the color to be replaced by video.

Use the secondary key color to key out a second background color. For example, for bluescreen foot-age, the ßoor may be a slightly different shade of blue than the background. You can choose the ßoor color as your secondary color and key it out. The secondary color is also useful when uneven light-ing introduces additional shades of the background color.

Use the spill suppression key color to Þx the follow-ing problems:

¥ Remove background color spill from the fore-ground image. Color spill occurs when the background color is present in the foreground image due to backdrop reßection.

¥ If the foreground object retains an outline of the chroma key color, you can use spill sup-pression to reduce the color effect in the out-line.

The spill suppression key neutralizes the selected color without affecting the luminance. The Com-poser system changes the spill color to a grayscale, allowing it to blend more easily with the fore-ground image.

Page 214: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

214

Description (continued)

Use the Gain parameter to vary the amount of fore-ground and background images displayed in the effect.

Use the Softness parameter to soften the edges of the key.

Use the Position and Size parameters to change the size and position of the key image.

Use the Crop parameters to remove the edges of the key image.

Use the Level parameter to fade the keyed image in and out.

Chroma key effect

Key image – video layer 2Background – video layer 1

Page 215: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

215

Controlling Key and Spill Colors

The following illustration shows the Key Color Fast menu and also shows the Color Preview window, used to activate the Eyedropper tool.

Controlling the primary and secondary key colors

1. Select Primary Key or Secondary key from the Key Color fast menu.

2. Select the key color. You typically use the eyedropper to select the color at the backdrop.

3. If you are adjusting the secondary key color, click the Enable Sec-ondary Key.

4. Use the Key Control sliders to control the amount (gain) and soft-ness of the key color removal.

Controlling the spill color

1. Select Spill Suppression from the Key Color fast menu.

The Composer system displays the Spill Suppression pane.

Move the mouse to the Color Preview window to activate the Eyedropper tool.

Page 216: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

216

2. Use the eyedropper to select a spill color in the foreground image.

3. Click the Enable Spill Suppression button and adjust the gain and softness sliders as needed.

Real-Time and Non-Real-Time Effects

When you enable spill suppression, the effect changes from a real-time effect (orange dot) to a non-real-time effect (blue dot). Typically you would rough out the primary and secondary key colors Þrst in real time and then work on the spill suppression. This allows you to play the effect until you start work on spill suppression.

Page 217: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

217

Luma Key

Effect Category Key

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Crop Ð top, bottom, left, and right

Color Selection Ð Key Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Key Control Ð gain and softness

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Position and Size Ð horizontal position, vertical posi-tion, size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes Ñ inverts the key

Description Replaces one part of the video image with another video image based on luminance.

Use the Gain parameter to vary the amount of fore-ground and background images in the effect.

Use the Softness parameter to soften the edges of the key.

Use the Position and Size parameters to change the size and position of the upper video image.

Use the Crop parameters to remove the edges of the key.

Page 218: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

218

Luma key effect

Background imageKey image

Page 219: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

219

Matte Key

Effect Category Key

Apply to Multilayer segments

Parameters Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Position and Size Ð horizontal position, vertical position, size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Reversible Yes

Description A three-layer track effect. The bottom layer (V1) is the background image, the middle layer (V2) is the foreground image, and the top layer (V3) contains the matte or alpha channel. The bottom layer shows through the lightest part of the matte. The middle layer shows through the darkest part of the matte. The darker the matte, the more the middle layer will show through.

To change the size, position, and shape of the matte image, use the Position and Size parameters.

Page 220: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

220

n If your system has the 3D Effects option, see ÒUsing Matte Keys with 3D EffectsÓ on page 316.

Matte key effect

Video layer 3 – matte key

Video layer 2 – foreground

Matte key original PICT

Video layer 1 – background

Page 221: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

221

L-Conceal Effects

L-Conceal effects overlap one video channel over another using a pre-deÞned L-shaped path. They include:

¥ Bottom Left

¥ Bottom Right

¥ Top Left

¥ Top Right

Bottom Left

Effect Category L-Conceal

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Key Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video slides, in an L-shape, on top of the outgoing video from the bottom-left to the top-right of the screen.

Page 222: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

222

Bottom Right

Effect Category L-Conceal

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video slides, in an L-shape, on top of the outgoing video from the bottom-right to the top-left of the screen.

Page 223: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

223

Top Left

Effect Category L-Conceal

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video slides, in an L-shape, on top of the outgoing video from the top-left to the bottom-right of the screen.

Page 224: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

224

Top Right

Effect Category L-Conceal

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video slides, in an L-shape, on top of the outgoing video from the top-right to the bot-tom-left of the screen.

Page 225: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

225

Motion Effects

A motion effect is applied to a clip in the Source monitor and controls the rate at which the video channel is played. Motion effects include:

¥ Freeze Frame

¥ Variable Speed

¥ Strobe Motion

n When you use Motion effects to slow down a clip, the effect is real time. When you use the Motion effect to speed up a clip, the effect is non-real time, and must be rendered before it can be played.

Page 226: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

226

Freeze Frame

To create a Freeze Frame effect, select Freeze Frame from the Clip menu. A pop-up menu appears:

Effect Category Motion

Apply to Current frame in the Source monitor

Parameters Motion Effects Ð duration and two-Þeld media

Reversible No

Description This effect repeats the current frame in the Source monitor for the speciÞed duration.

Duration

Custom duration

Page 227: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

227

Duration

The Duration parameter speciÞes the length of the freeze frame clip that will be created in the Source monitor. You can either select a dura-tion from the Freeze Frame pop-up menu or select Other to enter a custom duration.

Two-Field Freeze Frames

The Two-Field Freeze Frames parameter determines how two-Þeld media will be processed to create the Motion effect.

¥ Using Duplicated Field Ð A single Þeld is displayed in the effect.

¥ Using Both Fields Ð Both Þelds are displayed in the effect.

¥ Using Interpolated Field Ð A second Þeld is created for the effect by combining scan line pars from the Þrst Þeld in the original media.

After the Freeze Frame effect is applied, a new clip is created in the Source monitor and in the current bin. The clip appears in the bin pre-ceded by a Motion effect icon. The clip is named the original clip name followed by the letters FF.

This clip can then be edited into your sequence like any other clip.

Page 228: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

228

Variable Speed

To access the Variable Speed effect, select the Motion Effect button on the Fast menu above the Source monitor. The Motion Effect Parame-ters dialog box appears.

Effect Category Motion

Apply to The clip marked by the IN and OUT Marks in the Source monitor.

Parameters Motion Effects Ð variable speed and two-Þeld media

Reversible Yes by typing a minus sign (-) in from of the speed percent.

Description Creates slow motion, fast motion, or reverse motion based on the Variable speed speciÞed.

Variable Speed effect

Page 229: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

229

You can specify the play speed for the Variable Speed Motion effect in several ways: The play speed can be speciÞed as a number of frames, a frame rate, or a percent of the current play rate. When one of these is set, all values change to reßect the speciÞed play rate.

¥ Duration Ð is the duration of the effect in frames. Doubling the number of frames causes the frame rate to be half the current rate.

¥ Rate Ð is the rate of speed in frames per second (fps) at which the video will be played. Normal speed is 30 fps for NTSC video, 25 fps for PAL video, and 24 fps for Þlm.

¥ %speed Ð is the percent of speed at which the video will be played. 100% is normal speed.

¥ Fit To Fill Ð sets the Variable Speed parameters, so the duration of the Motion effect will match the IN to OUT duration marked in the Record monitor.

When you select the Fit To Fill parameter, the Variable Speed parame-ters are adjusted so that the clip generated from the source media will be the correct duration to Þll the duration speciÞed by the IN and OUT marks in the Record monitor.

To indicate reverse motion at full play rate, slow or fast, enter a nega-tive play rate or a percent. The Composer system creates slow motion clips by duplicating frames in the original media. It creates fast motion effects by eliminating frames from the original media. The resulting motion may appear to be jerky.

Page 230: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

230

After you select the Variable Speed effect, a new clip is created in the Source monitor and in the current bin. The clip appears in the bin pre-ceded by a Motion effect icon. The clip is named with the original clip name followed by the frame rate in parentheses. This clip can then be edited into your sequence like any other clip.

Strobe Motion

To access the Strobe Motion effect, select the Motion Effect button on the Fast menu above the Source monitor. The Motion Effect Parame-ters dialog box appears:

Effect Category Motion

Apply to The clip marked by the IN and OUT Marks in the Source monitor.

Parameters Motion Effects Ð strobe motion update rate and two-Þeld media

Reversible No

Description Specify the update rate for the Strobe effect in frames. The Strobe Motion effect can be used in combination with the Variable Speed effect.

Page 231: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

231

Strobe Motion Update Rate

The Strobe Motion parameter speciÞes the update rate in frames for the Strobe effect. For example, a rate of 5 causes every Þfth frame to be displayed in the Strobe effect.

Render 2-Field Motion Effect

The Render 2-Field Motion Effect parameter determines how two-Þeld media will be processed to create the Motion effect.

¥ Duplicated Field Ð A single Þeld is displayed in the effect.

¥ Both Fields Ð Both Þelds are displayed in the effect.

¥ Interpolated Field Ð A second Þeld is created for the effect by com-bining scan line pairs from the Þrst Þeld in the original media.

Strobe Motion effect

Page 232: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

232

After the Strobe Motion effect is selected, a new clip is created in the Source monitor and in the current bin. The clip appears in the bin pre-ceded by a Motion effect icon. The clip is named with the original clip name followed by the word Strobe and the number of frames in paren-theses.

This clip can then be edited into your sequence like any other clip.

Page 233: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

233

Peel Effects

Peel effects treat one video channel as though it were a sheet of paper being peeled from the other video channel. They include:

¥ Bottom Left Corner

¥ Bottom Right Corner

¥ Bottom to Top

¥ Left to Right

¥ Right to Left

¥ Top Left Corner

¥ Top Right Corner

¥ Top to Bottom

For an example of a Peel effect, see ÒTop Left CornerÓ on page 239.

Page 234: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

234

Bottom Left Corner

Effect Category Peel

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video material is peeled from outgoing video from the bottom-left corner to the top-right corner of the screen.

Page 235: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

235

Bottom Right Corner

Effect Category Peel

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video material is peeled from outgoing video from the bottom-right corner to the top-left corner of the screen.

Page 236: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

236

Bottom to Top

Effect Category Peel

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video material is peeled from outgoing video from the bottom edge to the top edge of the screen.

Page 237: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

237

Left to Right

Effect Category Peel

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video material is peeled from outgoing video from the left edge to the right edge of the screen.

Page 238: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

238

Right to Left

Effect Category Peel

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video material is peeled from outgoing video from the right edge to the left edge of the screen.

Page 239: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

239

Top Left Corner

Effect Category Peel

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video material is peeled from outgoing video from the top-left corner to the bottom-right corner of the screen.

The following example includes a Border Color and Border Blend.

Peel effect with border

Incoming videoOutgoing video

Page 240: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

240

Top Right Corner

Effect Category Peel

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video is peeled from outgoing video from the top-right corner to the bottom-left corner of the screen.

Page 241: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

241

Top to Bottom

Effect Category Peel

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video material is peeled from outgoing video from the top to the bottom of the screen.

Page 242: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

242

Push Effects

Push effects move one video channel to Þll the screen while the other video channel is pushed out of the screen. They include:

¥ Bottom Left to Top Right

¥ Bottom Right to Top Left

¥ Bottom to Top

¥ Left to Right

¥ Right to Left

¥ Top Left to Bottom Right

¥ Top Right to Bottom Left

¥ Top to Bottom

For an example of a Push effect, see ÒTop Left to Bottom RightÓ on page 248.

For examples of similar effects, see ÒComparison of Similar EffectsÓ on page 308.

Page 243: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

243

Bottom Left to Top Right

Effect Category Push

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Background Color, Border Color, and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video pushes out outgoing video from the bottom-left corner to the top-right corner of the screen. Border is on incoming video.

Page 244: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

244

Bottom Right to Top Left

Effect Category Push

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Background Color, Border Color, and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video pushes out outgoing video from bottom-right corner to top-left corner of the screen. Border is on incoming video.

Page 245: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

245

Bottom to Top

Effect Category Push

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Background Color, Border Color, and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video pushes out outgoing video from the bottom to the top of the screen. Border is on incoming video.

Page 246: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

246

Left to Right

Effect Category Push

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Background Color, Border Color, and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video pushes out outgoing video from the left edge to the right edge of the screen. Border is on incoming video.

Page 247: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

247

Right to Left

Effect Category Push

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Background Color, Border Color, and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video pushes out outgoing video from the right edge to the left edge of the screen. Border is on incoming video.

Page 248: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

248

Top Left to Bottom Right

n For examples of similar effects, seeÒComparison of Similar EffectsÓ on page 308.

Effect Category Push

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Background Color, Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video pushes out outgoing video from the top-left corner to the bottom-right corner of screen. Border is on incoming video.

Push effect

Incoming videoOutgoing video

Page 249: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

249

Top Right to Bottom Left

Effect Category Push

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Background Color, Border Color, and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video pushes out outgoing video from the top-right corner to the bottom-left corner of the screen. Border is on incoming video.

Page 250: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

250

Top to Bottom

Spin Effects

Spin effects rotate one or more video channels. They include:

¥ X Spin

¥ Y Spin

¥ Z Spin

Effect Category Push

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Background Color, Border Color, and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video pushes out outgoing video from the top to the bottom of the screen. Border is on incoming video.

Page 251: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

251

X Spin

Effect Category Spin

Apply to Transitions

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Background Color, Border Color, and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Outgoing video is squeezed until it appears as a vertical line. The incoming video then expands from that vertical line until it Þlls the screen. Border appears only on the incoming video. See the exam-ple on the following page.

X Spin effect with pink background

Incoming videoOutgoing video

Page 252: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

252

Y Spin

Effect Category Spin

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Background Color, Border Color, and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Outgoing video is squeezed until it appears as a horizontal line. The incoming video then expands from that horizontal line until it Þlls the screen.

Page 253: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

253

Z Spin

Effect Category Spin

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Color Selection Ð Background Color Ð hue, satura-tion, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video starts as a dot in the center of the screen and then enlarges to full screen while rotating counter clockwise one full revolution cov-ering the outgoing video.

Page 254: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

254

Z Spin effect inverted

Outgoing video Incoming video

Page 255: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

255

Squeeze Effects

Squeeze effects expand a video channel from a single point or line until it Þlls the screen, obscuring the second video channel. They include:

¥ Bottom Centered

¥ Bottom Left

¥ Bottom Right

¥ Bottom To Top

¥ Centered Zoom

¥ Horizontal Centered

¥ Left Centered

¥ Left To Right

¥ Right Centered

¥ Right To Left

¥ Top Centered

¥ Top Left

¥ Top Right

¥ Top to Bottom

¥ Vertical Centered

For an example of a Squeeze effect, see ÒTop LeftÓ on page 267.

For examples of similar effects, see ÒComparison of Similar EffectsÓ on page 308.

Page 256: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

256

Bottom Centered

Effect Category Squeeze

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video squeezes over the outgoing video, beginning as a rectangle in the center bottom edge of the screen and expanding to Þll the screen.

Page 257: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

257

Bottom Left

Effect Category Squeeze

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video squeezes over the outgoing video, beginning as a rectangle in the bottom-left corner and expanding to Þll the screen.

Page 258: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

258

Bottom Right

Effect Category Squeeze

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video squeezes over the outgoing video, beginning as a rectangle in the bottom-right corner and expanding to Þll the screen.

Page 259: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

259

Bottom to Top

Effect Category Squeeze

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video squeezes over the outgoing video, beginning at the bottom of the screen and Þlling to the top of the screen.

Page 260: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

260

Centered Zoom

Effect Category Squeeze

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video starts as a rectangle in the center of the screen and zooms to Þll the screen.

Page 261: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

261

Horizontal Centered

Effect Category Squeeze

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video starts as a horizontal band squeezed in the center of the screen and expands horizontally to Þll the screen.

Page 262: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

262

Left Centered

Effect Category Squeeze

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video squeezes over the outgoing video, beginning as a rectangle in the center left edge of the screen and expanding to Þll the screen.

Page 263: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

263

Left to Right

Effect Category Squeeze

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video squeezes over the outgoing video, beginning at the left edge of screen and Þlling to the right edge of the screen.

Page 264: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

264

Right Centered

Effect Category Squeeze

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video squeezes over the outgoing video, beginning as a rectangle in the center right edge of the screen and expanding to Þll the screen.

Page 265: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

265

Right to Left

Effect Category Squeeze

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video squeezes over the outgoing video beginning at right edge of the screen and Þlling to the left edge of screen.

Page 266: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

266

Top Centered

Effect Category Squeeze

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video squeezes over the outgoing video, beginning as a rectangle in the center top edge of the screen and expanding to Þll the screen.

Page 267: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

267

Top Left

n For examples of similar effects, see ÒComparison of Similar EffectsÓ on page 308.

Effect Category Squeeze

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video squeezes over the outgoing video, beginning as a rectangle in the top left corner and expanding to Þll the screen.

Squeeze effect

Incoming videoOutgoing video

Page 268: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

268

Top Right

Effect Category Squeeze

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video squeezes over the outgoing video, beginning as a rectangle in the top-right corner and expanding to Þll the screen.

Page 269: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

269

Top to Bottom

Effect Category Squeeze

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video squeezes over the outgoing video, beginning at the top edge of the screen and Þlling to the bottom edge of the screen.

Page 270: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

270

Vertical Centered

Effect Category Squeeze

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video starts as a vertical band squeezed in the center of the screen and expands vertically to Þll the screen.

Page 271: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

271

Box Wipes

Box Wipes reveal one video channel on top of another video channel, using predeÞned growing rectangular shapes. They include:

¥ Bottom Box

¥ Left Box

¥ Lower Left Corner

¥ Lower Right Corner

¥ Upper Right Corner

¥ Right Box

¥ Top Box

¥ Upper Left Corner

¥ Upper Right Corner

For an example of a Box Wipe effect, see ÒUpper Left CornerÓ on page 278.

For examples of similar effects, see ÒComparison of Similar EffectsÓ on page 308.

Page 272: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

272

Bottom Box

Effect Category Box Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a rectangle in the center of the bottom edge of the screen and wipes out out-going video as it expands to Þll screen.

Page 273: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

273

Left Box

Effect Category Box Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a box in the center of the left edge of the screen. The incoming video wipes out the outgoing video as the box expands to Þll the screen.

Page 274: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

274

Lower Left Corner

Effect Category Box Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a box in the bottom-left corner of the screen. The incoming video wipes out the outgoing video as the box expands to Þll the screen.

Page 275: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

275

Lower Right Corner

Effect Category Box Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a box in the bottom-right corner of the screen. The incoming video wipes out the outgoing video as the box expands to Þll the screen.

Page 276: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

276

Right Box

Effect Category Box Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a box on the right edge of the screen. The incoming video wipes out the out-going video as the box expands to Þll the screen.

Page 277: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

277

Top Box

Effect Category Box Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a rectangle in the center of the top edge of the screen and wipes out outgo-ing video as it expands to Þll the screen.

Page 278: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

278

Upper Left Corner

Effect Category Box Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a box in the top-left cor-ner of the screen. The incoming video wipes out the outgoing video as the box expands to Þll the screen

Box Wipe effect

Incoming videoOutgoing video

Page 279: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

279

Upper Right Corner

Effect Category Box Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a box in the top-right cor-ner of the screen. The incoming video wipes out the outgoing video as the box expands to Þll the screen.

Page 280: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

280

Edge Wipes

Edge Wipes reveal one video channel on top of another video channel by wiping either a horizontal, vertical, or diagonal edge across the screen following a predeÞned path. They include:

¥ Horizontal

¥ Horizontal Open

¥ Lower Left Diagonal

¥ Lower Right Diagonal

¥ Upper Left Diagonal

¥ Upper Right Diagonal

¥ Vertical

¥ Vertical Open

Page 281: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

281

Horizontal

Effect Category Edge Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins at the left edge of the screen and moves to the right edge wiping out the outgo-ing video.

Edge Wipe effect

Incoming videoOutgoing video

Page 282: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

282

Horizontal Open

Effect Category Edge Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video begins as a vertical band in the center of the screen. This band expands to the left and right edges of the screen wiping out the outgo-ing video.

Page 283: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

283

Lower Left Diagonal

Effect Category Edge Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Position and Size Ð size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video begins in the bottom-left cor-ner of the screen and wipes out the outgoing video as a diagonal line moves from the bottom-left cor-ner to the top-right corner of the screen.

When Fixed Aspect is disabled, the Height and Width parameters adjust the angle of the diagonal line that sweeps the screen.

Page 284: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

284

Lower Right Diagonal

Effect Category Edge Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Position and Size Ð size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video begins in the bottom-right cor-ner of the screen and wipes out the outgoing video as a diagonal line moves from the bottom-right cor-ner to the top-left corner of the screen.

When Fixed Aspect is disabled, the Height and Width parameters adjust the angle of the diagonal line that sweeps the screen.

Page 285: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

285

Upper Left Diagonal

Effect Category Edge Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Position and Size Ð size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video begins in the top-left corner of the screen and wipes out the outgoing video as a diagonal line moves from the top-left corner to the bottom-right corner of the screen.

When Fixed Aspect is disabled, the Height and Width parameters adjust the angle of the diagonal line that sweeps the screen.

Page 286: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

286

Upper Right Diagonal

Effect Category Edge Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Position and Size Ð size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video begins in the top-right corner of the screen and wipes out the outgoing video as a diagonal line moves from the top-right corner of the screen to the bottom-left corner.

Page 287: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

287

Vertical

Effect Category Edge Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins at the top edge of the screen and expands downward to Þll the screen.

Page 288: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

288

Vertical Open

Matrix Wipes

Matrix wipes reveal one video channel on top of another video chan-nel using blocks or bands that appear in a predeÞned position or path. They include:

¥ Block Spiral

¥ Grid

¥ One-Way Row

¥ Speckle

¥ Zig-Zag

For an example of a Matrix Wipe, see ÒGridÓ on page 290.

Effect Category Edge Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a horizontal band in the center of the screen. This band expands up and down to Þll the screen.

Page 289: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

289

Block Spiral

Effect Category Matrix Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Matrix Ð columns and rows

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video spirals over and wipes out the outgoing video using blocks of screen space start-ing in the bottom-left corner of the screen and spi-rals inward in a counter clockwise movement.

The Columns and Rows parameters change the size of the blocks in the spiral.

Page 290: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

290

Grid

Effect Category Matrix Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Matrix Ð columns and rows

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as blocks in a grid pattern that wipe out the outgoing video as the blocks expand to Þll the screen. The Columns and Rows change the size of the grid.

Grid Wipe effect

Incoming videoOutgoing video

Page 291: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

291

One-Way Row

Effect Category Matrix Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Matrix Ð columns and rows

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a block at the top-left cor-ner of the screen that wipes out the outgoing video as the band expands horizontally across the screen from left to right. When the Þrst horizontal band has reached the right edge of the screen, a second band appears on the left edge of the screen, just below the Þrst band, and repeats the process until the incoming video has wiped out all of the outgo-ing video.

The Columns and Rows parameters determine the number of bands needed to Þll the screen.

Page 292: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

292

Speckle

Effect Category Matrix Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Matrix Ð columns and rows

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description The incoming video appears in a random series of blocks that wipe out the outgoing video until the blocks have Þlled the screen.

The Columns and Rows parameters determine and the number and size of blocks in the effect.

Page 293: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

293

Zig-Zag

Effect Category Matrix Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Matrix Ð columns and rows

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a single block at the top-left corner of the screen that wipes out the outgoing video as the band expands horizontally across the screen from left to right. When the Þrst horizontal band reaches the right edge of the screen, a second band appears on the right edge of the screen, just below the Þrst band, and expands horizontally across the screen from right to left. Succeeding bands repeat the process until the incoming video has wiped out all of the outgoing video.

The Columns and Rows parameters change the number of bands and the size of the blocks in the effect.

Page 294: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

294

Saw Tooth Wipes

Saw Tooth wipes are described in this section. They include:

¥ Horizontal Open Saw Tooth

¥ Horizontal Saw Tooth

¥ Vertical Open Saw Tooth

¥ Vertical Saw Tooth

For an example of a Saw Tooth Wipe effect, see ÒVertical Open Saw ToothÓ on page 296.

Horizontal Open Saw Tooth

Effect Category Saw Tooth Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Matrix Ð columns and rows

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a vertical saw tooth in the center of the screen. The saw tooth then expands outward to the left and right edges of the screen to display the incoming video in the center while cov-ering the outgoing video.

The Columns and Rows parameters change the size and shape of the points on the saw tooth.

Page 295: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

295

Horizontal Saw Tooth

Effect Category Saw Tooth Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Matrix Ð columns and rows

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video appears with a saw tooth on the left edge of the screen. The saw tooth edge moves to the right edge of the screen covering the outgo-ing video as the incoming video appears to the left of the saw tooth.

The Columns and Rows parameters change the size and shape of the points on the saw tooth.

Page 296: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

296

Vertical Open Saw Tooth

Effect Category Saw Tooth Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Matrix Ð columns and rows

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a horizontal saw tooth in the center of the screen. The saw tooth expands up and down covering the outgoing video and dis-playing the incoming video in the center.

The Columns and Rows parameters change the size and shape of the points on the saw tooth.

Saw Tooth Wipe effect

Incoming videoOutgoing video

Page 297: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

297

Vertical Saw Tooth

Effect Category Saw Tooth Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Matrix Ð columns and rows

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a saw tooth on the top of the screen. The saw tooth moves down, covering the outgoing video and displaying the incoming video above the saw tooth.

The Columns and Rows parameters change the size and shape of the points on the saw tooth.

Page 298: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

298

Shape Wipes

Shape wipes reveal one video channel on top of another video channel using a growing or moving geometric shape. They include:

¥ Center Box

¥ Circle

¥ Clock

¥ Diamond

¥ Ellipse

¥ Four Corners

¥ Horizontal Bands

¥ Horizontal Blind

¥ Vertical Blind

For an example of a Shape Wipe effect, see ÒCircleÓ on page 300 (Þg-ure on page 3-301).

Page 299: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

299

Center Box

Effect Category Shape Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Position and Size Ð horizontal position, vertical position, size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a box in the center of the screen and wipes out the outgoing video as it expands to Þll the screen.

Page 300: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

300

Circle

Effect Category Shape Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Position and Size Ð horizontal position, vertical position, size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection ÐBorder Color Ðhue, saturation, and luminance

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a circle in the center and wipes out the outgoing video as it expands to Þll the screen.

With Fixed Aspect disabled, use the Width and Height sliders to change the circle into an ellipse.

Use the Position and Size parameters with key frames to change the size, shape, and position of the circle over time.

Page 301: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

301

Incoming videoOutgoing video

Circle Wipe effect

Page 302: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

302

Clock

Diamond

Effect Category Shape Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video appears as a vertical line from the center of the screen to the top edge. The incoming video replaces the outgoing video in a clockwise motion as if it were the hand on a clock.

Effect Category Shape Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Position and Size Ð horizontal position, vertical position, size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as a diamond in the center of the screen and wipes out the outgoing video as it expands to Þll the screen.

Use the Position and Size parameters to change the size, shape, and position of the diamond.

Page 303: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

303

Ellipse

Effect Category Shape Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Position and Size Ð horizontal position, vertical position, size, height, width, and Þxed aspect

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection ÐBorder Color Ðhue, saturation, and luminance

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as an ellipse in the center of the screen and wipes out the outgoing video as it expands to Þll the screen.

Page 304: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

304

Four Corners

Effect Category Shape Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as blocks in four corners of the screen and wipes out the outgoing video as the blocks expand to Þll the screen.

Page 305: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

305

Horizontal Bands

Effect Category Shape Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Matrix Ð columns and rows

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as horizontal bands placed opposite alternate bands of outgoing video. The incoming video wipes out the outgoing video as the horizontal bands expand toward the center of the screen.

Use the Other Options button to access the Number of Blocks parameter to specify the number of bands of video in the wipe.

Page 306: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

306

Horizontal Blind

Effect Category Shape Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Matrix Ð columns and rows

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as vertical bands on the screen that wipe out the outgoing video as the incoming video bands expand horizontally to Þll the screen.

Use the Other Options button to access the Number of Blocks parameter to specify the number of bands of video in the wipe.

Page 307: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

307

Vertical Blind

Effect Category Shape Wipe

Apply to Transitions, multilayer segments

Parameters Border Ð width and softness

Color Selection Ð Border Color and Border Blend Ð hue, saturation, and luminance

Matrix Ð rows and columns

Rate Control Ð acceleration and level

Transition Ð relative position and duration

Reversible Yes

Description Incoming video begins as horizontal bands on the screen that wipe out the outgoing video as the incoming video bands expand vertically to Þll the screen.

Use the Other Options button to access the Number of Blocks parameter to specify the number of bands of video in the wipe.

Page 308: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

308

Comparison of Similar Effects

There are four effects that have a similar result: Box Wipe, Conceal, Push, and Squeeze. Examples of these effects are shown here to assist you in using these effects. Each of these effects was created with the same outgoing and incoming video.

Box Wipe – Upper Left Corner

Incoming videoOutgoing video

Box Wipe effect

Page 309: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

309

Conceal – Top Left to Bottom Right

Push – Top Left to Bottom Right

Squeeze – Top Left

Conceal effect

Push effect

Squeeze effect

Page 310: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

310

CHAPTER 4

3D Effects Editing

This chapter describes the software features for the 3D Effects option. This option includes a set of three effect boards, an interface daughter card for the Advanced JPEG board, a SCSI cable, and the associated installation hardware.

The 3D Effects option delivers a wide range of digital video effects including the following.

¥ Image effects such as blur (defocus) and resize with rotation and perspective

¥ Two-channel segment effects including smooth motion picture-in-picture

¥ Shapes, including 3D spheres and four-way page curls

¥ Positioning, scaling, skewing, and rotation, with perspective

¥ Source cropping

¥ Internal borders including beveled and rounded edges

¥ Soft borders

¥ Trails and drop shadows with varying opacity

¥ Highlights, wipe generator, chroma, and luma keys

Page 311: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

311

3D Effects allow you to play effects in reverse, or to step through an effect frame by frame without any preroll. 3D Effects can also handle multiple layers of 3D effects through rendering.

Getting Familiar with the Interface

All of the 3D Effects features are accessible through the 3D Warp effect in the Blend category. This section provides basic information for using the 3D Effects parameters, manipulating images, and turning the 3D option on and off.

n The 3D Warp effect is available only on Composer systems that have the 3D Effects option installed and are running Media Composer or Film Composer Release 5.5 or higher.

Accessing the 3D Effects Parameters

To access the 3D Effects parameters, apply the 3D Warp effect to a clip in your sequence and enter Effect mode.

1. Drag the 3D Warp effect icon onto a clip in the Timeline. For details on applying an effect, see ÒReal-Time EffectsÓ on page 26.

2. Click the Effect Mode button to enter Effect mode.

3D Warp allows you to access the 3D effects

Page 312: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

312

The 3D Warp parameters list appears:

The 3D Warp parameters list displays effect parameters grouped in collapsible panes. Each item in the list represents a speciÞc type of manipulation, called a category, that you can apply to an image. You can apply effect parameters either individually or in combination.

When a parameter pane is collapsed, only the triangular opener, cate-gory name, Fast menu (if any), and Enable button are visible.

For a description of the Effect Mode buttons, see ÒEffect Mode But-tonsÓ on page 46. Effect Mode buttons are the same for both 2D and 3D effects.

3D Warp parameters list

Effect Mode buttons

Triangularopener

Categoryname Fast menu

Enablebutton

Page 313: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

313

Opening Parameter Panes

Click the triangular opener next to the category name or double-click the category name to open the pane and view the parameter values. When you open a parameter pane, a scroll bar appears, allowing access to other categories hidden from view.

To close a parameter pane, click the triangular opener or double-click the category name.

n Option-click one triangular opener to open or close all of the parameter panes.

Using the Enable Button

When you click the Enable button, the parameters of that category become active for all key frames and affect the displayed image. When the Enable button is not highlighted, the category is inactive and the Composer system uses default values for those parameters. In this

Triangular opener selected for Shape category

Scroll bar

Enable button

Page 314: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

314

case, the Composer system saves any changes to the parameters along with the effect but does not apply them to the image.

Resetting Default Values

To reset the parameters for a category to their default values, Option-click the Enable button. This operation affects only selected key frames.

Using Effect Templates

Once you create an effect you can save it as a template for later use. (See ÒUsing an Effect TemplateÓ on page 69) This allows you to use the same effect in multiple places in a sequence or in different sequences.

Dragging and dropping an effect template onto the effect monitor or onto the effect segment in the Timeline applies all the values from the template.

Dragging and dropping an effect template onto an open parameter pane resets the parameters of the category to those of the Þrst key frame of the effect template. This allows you to use selected portions of effect templates. For example, if you like the Position setup of the template but not the Scaling setup, you can drag and drop the tem-plate onto the open Position parameter pane. This changes the Posi-tion values in the selected key frames to those of the Þrst key frame in the template.

Effects with 2D and 3D Versions

Several 3D Effects categories such as Position, Crop, and Border have corresponding 2D versions. In most cases the 3D versions have more options and allow for Þner adjustments. All of the 3D-speciÞc parame-ters are described in this chapter.

Page 315: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

315

The following parameters have 2D and 3D versions:

¥ Position

In the 3D version, you can move images in the X, Y, and Z axes.

¥ Scaling (Size)

¥ Border

In the 3D version you have multiple types of borders to choose from.

¥ Crop

¥ Luma and Chroma Keys

Use Luma Key and Chroma Key from the 3D foreground (Foregnd) category fast menu.

¥ Matte Key

You can create 3D matte keys from imported PICT Þles as you can with 2D effects; see ÒUsing Matte Keys with 3D EffectsÓ on page 316.

When performing dissolves in 3D, use the opacity (Opac) parameter value in the Foregnd parameter pane.

n All effects that were real time in 2D are still real time when you upgrade to 3D with the exception of Dip to Color. Dip to Color is not a real-time effect with the 3D Effects option. In addition, all Peel effects are now real time with the 3D Effects option.

Promoting 2D Effects to 3D Effects

You can use 2D effects as building blocks for 3D effects. For example, if you have a 2D Picture-In-Picture effect you can add 3D features like 3D borders, drop shadow, page curls, smooth curve movement, and rotation.

Page 316: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

316

To promote a 2D effect to a 3D effect

In Effect mode, highlight the segment and double-click the 3D Warp icon in the Effect Palette or click the 3D Promotion button.

n You cannot demote a 3D effect to a 2D effect. If you play a 3D effect on a sys-tem that does not have 3D hardware, the effect plays as a cut (unless the effect was rendered on the 3D system).

Using Matte Keys with 3D Effects

A matte key is an effect made up of three components: the high con-trast image or matte, the background image (the image that shows through the lightest part of the matte), and the foreground image (the image that shows through the darkest part of the matte).

Use the following procedure to create a matte key for use with 3D Effects:

1. Import a graphic Þle containing an alpha channel. The system cre-ates a matte key clip when you import the Þle as shown in the fol-lowing illustration.

For more information on matte key clips, see the topic ÒCreating a Matte Key EffectÓ on page 73.

2. Edit the matte key clip into your sequence as an overlay.

Make sure you turn on Render On-The-Fly so you can see the matte key as you are working with it.

Matte Key clip with alpha channel

Graphic master clip with no alpha channel

Page 317: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

317

3. Promote the matte key clip to a 3D Warp effect as explained in the section ÒPromoting 2D Effects to 3D EffectsÓ on page 315.

n You cannot promote matte keys created using the Matte Key effect from the 2D Effect palette to a 3D matte key.

n You should reimport any matte keys you created in releases earlier than Media Composer or Film Composer Version 5.50 in order to promote them.

Creating a 3D Title

In the same way that you can create a real-time 3D matte key, you can create a real-time 3D title. Use the Title tool to create the title in 2D, then promote the title to 3D after splicing it into a sequence.

To create a new title and promote it to 3D

1. In the Record monitor, place the blue position indicator on the video frame to be used as a reference.

2. Open the Compression tool (k-5) and set the level of compression to match the rest of the sequence.

3. Choose New Title on the Clip menu.

4. The Title Tool window appears.

5. Use the Title tool to create the title and save it in a bin.

6. Load the title into the Source monitor by dragging it from the bin.

7. Splice in the title at the desired place in the sequence.

In Effect mode, highlight the segment and click the 3D Promotion button or double-click the 3D Warp icon in the Effect Palette.

n You may want to create an effect template of a Title move and apply it to other titles. However, if you drag the effect icon to an effects bin, you attach the source video to the template. If you just want the effect key frames to apply to other titles, Option-drag the effect icon to the bin. When you do this, the sys-tem adds text to the end of the name of the template that says (Without Src).

Page 318: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

318

Turning the 3D Effects Option On and Off

The 3D Effects option is on by default. However, the 3D Effects option is not compatible with multicamera AVRs 2m Ð 6m. In addition, 24-fps Þlm projects are not compatible with the 3D option. If you need to use these AVRs, or if your 3D system is equipped with Film Options and you need to work on a 24-fps Þlm project, you can temporarily turn off or disable the 3D option with a Console command. You can enable the 3D option again with another Console command.

n While the 3D Effects option is disabled, the standard set of real-time 2D effects are available. For example, dissolves, superimpositions, and titles are real-time effects.

Turning Off the 3D Effects Option

1. Choose Console from the Tools menu. The Console window appears.

2. In the Console window, type the following command and press Return.

Disable3D

A message appears stating that the 3D Effects option is disabled.

3. Quit the Composer system application, and restart it.

As the application restarts, you see a message that the 3D effects are disabled. Also, when you look at the Effect Palette, notice that the 3D Warp effect is no longer available as part of the Blend effects. Any effects that were created with the 3D Warp option will play as a cut (unless rendered) while the 3D Effects option is disabled.

When the 3D Effects option is disabled, you still have the standard real-time effects that are available with an Advanced JPEG board Ñ for example, dissolves, superimposes, and titles are real time.

Page 319: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

319

Restarting the 3D Effects Option

Repeat Steps 1 through 3 above but use the following command in Step 2.

Enable3D

As the application restarts, you see the usual messages about initializ-ing the 3D effects. To verify that the 3D Effects option is enabled, you can open the Console window and scroll toward the top of the Console window. You will Þnd several status messages about the 3D Effects option.

c The Console window gives you access to low level commands that can alter the operation of the Composer system. Use only Console commands that are documented in Avid Tech Notes or user manuals.

Acceleration and Level Parameters

This section describes how the Level and Acceleration parameters work for 3D effects. The following illustration shows the Level and Acceleration sliders.

This is a graphical representation of the rate at which the effect will occur.

Use the Acceleration and Level slid-ers to adjust the rate and amount of the effect over time.

Page 320: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

320

Level Slider

The Level slider controls the foreground opacity of a 3D effect. This is the same as using the Opacity slider in the Forgnd (foreground) parameter pane. Use either control along with key frames to set the relative amount of opacity to be displayed over time. A level of 0 is 100 percent transparent, a level of 50 is 50 percent transparent, and a level of 100 is 100 percent opaque.

Acceleration

You can apply acceleration to a number of 3D Effects parameters. For example, you can use key frames and acceleration to adjust the speed of a rotating Picture-In-Picture effect.

Acceleration affects the following 3D Effect parameters:

¥ Shape (X and Y position)

¥ Position (if Spline is disabled)

¥ Scaling

¥ Rotation

¥ Axis

¥ Target

¥ Perspective

¥ Skew

¥ Crop

¥ Shadow (X and Y position)

For more information on Level and Acceleration, see ÒRate Control ParametersÓ on page 170.

Page 321: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

321

Setup Versus Key Frame Parameters

3D Effects parameters are divided into two logical groups.

¥ Setup parameters that apply to all key frames

¥ Key frame parameters that can change on an individual key frame basis

Setup Parameters

Setup parameters cannot change between key frames. When you change one of these parameters, the Composer system automatically sets the value for all key frames. The list below describes the setup parameters that cannot change between key frames.

¥ Shape selection and highlight type

¥ Border type and border color

¥ Foregnd (foreground) Swap Sources button

¥ Chroma key gain, threshold, hue, or high and low saturation

In general, you cannot change any of the 3D Effects parameter list check boxes or pop-up menus between key frames.

Key Frame Parameters

All of the effects in this category can change between key frames. This category includes the remainder of the 3D Effects parameters. Most of these parameters interact with each other. For example, you can rotate the image with perspective, skew the image so it slants to the right, apply a page curl, and add highlights and a semitransparent drop shadow.

Page 322: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

322

Manipulating an Image Using Parameter Panes

Click the triangular opener to open the parameter pane; then use the sliders or type values on the numeric keypad. The image automati-cally updates as you change values. For information on using sliders and the numeric keypad, see ÒChanging a ParameterÓ on page 50.

Manipulating an Image by Clicking and Dragging

You can perform a number of operations on an image by clicking and dragging handles attached to the image in the effect preview monitor. Click the image manipulation buttons under the effect preview moni-tor to activate the handles. Use the handles to manipulate the image; then click the button a second time to turn off the handles.

The following buttons map directly to 3D parameters: Corner Pin, Crop, Scale, Axis, Z Rotation, X Rotation, Y Rotation, XY Position, and XZ Position

The following illustration shows the handles for several of the fea-tures.

PathX Rotation

Y Rotation

XY Position

XZ Position Zoom in

Zoom outAxis

Scale Z Rotation

Crop

Corner Pin

Page 323: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

323

Motion Path Editor

Use the Path button when you want to see the path an image takes on the screen (for example, moving a Picture-In-Picture effect). The motion path editor displays the path between key frames as either a straight line or a smooth curve. Click the Spline category Enable but-ton to switch between a straight line and smooth curve. For a descrip-tion of the spline parameters, see ÒSpline Ñ Moving the Image Along a Smooth PathÓ on page 336. For an example see ÒUsing the Spline ParametersÓ on page 396.

Zooming In or Out on the Effect Monitor

Because you can move the bounds of a 3D effect outside the bounds of the enclosing frame, the Composer system lets you view an outline of the image area at a reduced scale. Use the Zoom In and Zoom Out but-tons under the effect preview monitor. These buttons serve the same function as the Enlarge Outline Scale and Reduce Outline Scale selec-tions on the Edit menu.

Scale X and Y at same time

Scale X

Scale Y

Rotate around Z AxisRotate around X Axis Rotate around Y Axis

Rotation AxisScale Position

Page 324: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

324

Moving in 3D Space

Moving objects in 3D space requires an understanding of each of the 3D Effect parameters and their correct order in the effects parameters hierarchy. You need to take this hierarchy into account to maintain the look of three-dimensional space when you change a selected parame-ter. The higher a parameter is in the hierarchy, the more parameters are taken into account below it when a change is made. The lower a parameter is in the hierarchy, the fewer parameters are taken into account. You donÕt need to use a lot of math to create most 3D effects, but you do need some basic understanding of degrees of motion and geometry.

The 3D Coordinate System

Throughout this chapter the terms X, Y, and Z refer to the three axes or dimensions of the image that can be manipulated in the 3D Effects coordinate space.

¥ X refers to the imageÕs left/right direction

¥ Y refers to the imageÕs up/down direction

¥ Z refers to the imageÕs front/back dimension

Page 325: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

325

Rotation Axes

The Shape and Rotation parameters allow you to rotate the image around the X, Y, and Z axes. Note that you can rotate more than 360 degrees between key frames. The following illustration shows how angles of rotation are distributed around a circle.

Z Axis

X Axis

Y Axis

X Axis — values increase from left to right

Y Axis — values increase from bottom to top

Z Axis — values increase from back to front

X0, Y0, Z0

Page 326: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

326

The following illustration shows several rotation examples.

– +

–90 degrees

–45 degrees

–180 degrees+180 degrees

+135 degrees–135 degrees

0 degrees

+45 degrees

+90 degrees

A

0 degrees

A

+180 degrees–180 degrees

A

A+45 degrees

–45 degrees

Page 327: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

327

About 3D Parameters

This section describes the hierarchy of 3D Effects parameters and then describes all of the parameter values except for Shapes. Shapes are described in Ò3D Effects ShapesÓ on page 356. See Chapter 5, for a series of examples that you can use to experiment with these parame-ters.

The Hierarchy of Parameters

The Composer system processes 3D Effects parameters in a speciÞc order. Knowing the order will help you understand why something looks a particular way or why an object behaves the way it does on a motion path.

The hierarchy of 3D Effects parameters is as follows.

Parameters that are lower in the hierarchy, like Crop, are not affected by parameters that are higher in the hierarchy, such as Rotation. In an effect that has both rotation and cropping, for example, the same four edges are always cropped the same way no matter what angle you have chosen for the rotation.

Lower

HigherTarget

Perspective

Position

Rotation

Axis

Scale

Crop

Page 328: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

328

However, parameters that are higher in the hierarchy will always take into account the parameters lower in the hierarchy when processing. For example, before an object is rotated, the system looks to see where the object is positioned in the frame to display the correct 3D point of view with the new angle.

ItÕs important to remember that no matter in what order you change your parameters, you will always end up with the same effect. How-ever, building an effect from the bottom of the hierarchy up will be easier to control. If you rotate an object Þrst (a higher parameter), and then move the axis (a lower parameter), your object may jump off the screen. In this case, the object is repositioned to the coordinates deter-mined by the rotational axis. It would be better to move the axis Þrst, then rotate the object. This low to high path in the hierarchy makes it easier to create the effect you want.

A Þnal point to keep in mind is that parameters operate as 2D, 3D, and post transformation. All of these choices affect the 3D path of the object differently. 2D parameters, such as Scale, are lowest in the hier-archy and do not affect the path through space at all. 3D parameters, such as Position, are the main source of motion along the 3D path and are used most commonly. Post-transformation parameters, such as Target, move the entire path without changing the effect itself because they move all the other parameters at the same time.

Page 329: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

329

Corner Pinning

Corner pinning is a way of positioning a 3D effect in a foreground video track over an object in a background video track. For example, you might want to have the foreground video appear to be playing on a TV set in the background video.

X pins the image along the X axis.

Y pins the image along the Y axis.

Follow Crop lets you pin the corners of a cropped image rather than pinning the corners of the whole frame.

For more information, see ÒCorner Pinning an ImageÓ on page 397.

Corner Pin button

Page 330: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

330

Crop — Cropping the Image

At the bottom of the effects parameters hierarchy is Crop. It always crops the same four edges of the object no matter what orientation the object has. Cropping works only in 2D space so that 3D parameters such as Rotation and Position, which are higher in the hierarchy, take effect later in the processing. You donÕt need to adjust cropping before the other parameters, but it is difÞcult to crop edges if they are rotated to the vanishing point. Use Crop to trim an imageÕs top, bottom, left, or right edges.

T (top) crops the top edge of the image. Values range from Ð999 (bot-tom) to 999 (top).

L (left) crops the left edge of the image. Values range from Ð999 (left) to 999 (right).

B (bottom) to crop the bottom edge of the image. Values range from Ð999 (bottom) to 999 (top).

R (right) crops the right edge of the image. Values range from Ð999 (left) to 999 (right).

For cropping, the values Ð999 to 999 are relative to the edges of the image. Zero is the center of the image.

Crop button

Page 331: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

331

Scaling — Changing the Size

Just above Crop, near the bottom of the effects parameters hierarchy, is Scale. Scaling an image also takes place in 2D but it may create the illu-sion that the image has moved away from the screen. This is because the surface of the video monitor, in reality, is only a 2D surface and there is no way of turning the monitor sideways to see if an object is smaller or has Òmoved awayÓ from the screen. You can create many moves with Scale that appear to move toward or away from the screen. In fact, because of its ease of use, the Scale button on the tool-bar may be the most direct method to create moves that appear to move toward or away from the screen.

The difference between Scale and other motion parameters, such as Position, is that the point of view of the object does not change. Point of view changes only when you move an object in 3D space. Therefore, if you want to change only the size of an object, Scale is an appropriate choice. For example, if you have rotated an object and it is too large, Scale resizes it while maintaining the same position and point of view on the screen.

You can change X and Y together or separately. If you change values separately, you change the aspect ratio of the image.

X stretches or compresses along the X axis (horizontally). Values range from 0 to 400, where 100 indicates 100 percent scaling.

Y stretches or compresses along the Y axis (vertically). Values range from 0 to 400, where 100 indicates 100 percent scaling.

To adjust X and Y at the same time (and maintain the aspect ratio), use the Scale button.

Scale button

Page 332: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

332

Axis — Moving the Center of Rotation

Axis is the center of the rotation for X, Y, and Z rotation parameters. It defaults to the center of the object at the beginning of any effect. An image has no Þxed rotation axis. The axis is independent of the image, and moveable. For example, the rotation axis can be placed in the cen-ter of, on the edge of, or off the image.

You should enable the Axis button on the direct manipulation toolbar when working with axis to see easily where the crosspoint will be. It is also useful to zoom out with the magnifying glass to graphically see the movement of the axis over time. See ÒZooming In or Out on the Effect MonitorÓ on page 323.

Axis precedes Rotation in the hierarchy for the very important reason that Rotation requires an axis point to be set Þrst. If you set Rotation and then move the axis point, the object will jump to an unpredictable place based on the new center of rotation.

If the axis moves to the bottom corner of the object, then that is the point of rotation for the object. If the axis moves off the actual object, then the radius of the rotation gets larger.

You can move axis between key frames to allow a shape to rotate in on one axis and rotate out on another. Generally there should be a pair of static frames to allow the axis to move invisibly. There are, however, some interesting effects in which the axis moves during the motion. This is an easy way to make an otherwise normal move have an unusual path.

X moves the center of rotation along the X axis (right or left). Values range from Ð999 to +999, where 0 is the center of the X axis.

Axis button

Page 333: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

333

Y moves the center of rotation along the Y axis (up or down). Values range from Ð999 to +999, where 0 is the center of the Y axis.

Z moves the center of rotation along the Z axis. Values can range from Ð999 to +999, where 0 is the center of the Z axis. Positive values are closer and negative values are farther away. Adjusting the Z value moves the center of rotation off the plane of the video screen.

Skew — Tilting the Image

Use Skew to skew or tilt an image in the X or Y direction.

X skews the image along the X axis. The orientation of the top and bot-tom edges remain Þxed, while the left and right edges are tilted along the X axis into a parallelogram. Values range from Ð999 to +999, where 0 represents no change.

Y skews the image along the Y axis. The orientation of the left and right edges remain Þxed, while the top and bottom edges are tilted along the Y axis into a parallelogram. Values range from Ð999 to +999, where 0 represents no change.

Rotate — Rotating an Effect

You can rotate an object on X, Y, and Z axes. Once an object is rotated, the perspective changes depending on Position, the lower parameter in the hierarchy.

Rotation buttons

Z X Y

Page 334: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

334

Rotation does not affect the path of the object. Thus, you will not see changes in Rotation when you click the Path button. This means that Spline does not smooth out rotational stops and starts.

Because you are working with the illusion of 3D space in a 2D environ-ment, a certain anomaly occurs when an object rotates until you see it from the side. If the edge is straight on to the viewer, the object actu-ally disappears from sight. This can be a useful way to rotate an object into view or to change the backside of an object as it ßips around.

Z rotates the image around the Z axis (clockwise or counterclockwise). Values range from Ð720 to +720, where 0 is the default.

X rotates the image around the X axis. Values range from Ð720 to +720, where 0 is the default.

Y rotates the image around the Y axis. Values range from Ð720 to +720, where 0 is the default.

The 720 degree value allows you to spin the image more than once between two key frames. For an explanation of rotation angles, see ÒRotation AxesÓ on page 325.

Position — Moving the Image

Position is a true 3D parameter because it allows you to move objects away from the screen and change the perspective when the object begins to rotate. This more closely simulates human perception of objects in space. The difference in perspective between an object that is scaled and an object that is moved backward on the Z axis is subtle, but is a factor when rotation and perspective are important. Notice

Position buttons

XY XZ

Page 335: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

335

how the point of view changes if you rotate an object and then move it with Position on any axis.

To create a smooth landing when an object is moving away or toward the screen, use Position in conjunction with Spline. See ÒSpline Ñ Moving the Image Along a Smooth PathÓ on page 336.

X moves the image along the screenÕs X axis (horizontally). Values range from Ð3000 to +3000, where 0 is the center of the X axis. Negative values move the image to the left and positive values move the image to the right.

Y moves the image along the screenÕs Y axis (vertically). Values range from Ð3000 to +3000, where 0 is the center of the Y axis. Negative val-ues move the image down and positive values move the image up.

The large X and Y values allow you to move the image completely off the screen if you have Z perspective turned on and you are using a large Z value.

Z moves the image along the screenÕs Z axis (front/back). Values range from Ð999 to +249, where 0 is the center of the Z axis. Relative to the ÒplaneÓ of the video screen, positive values move the image closer to you, and negative numbers move the image farther away.

For an illustration of the XYZ coordinate system, see ÒThe 3D Coordi-nate SystemÓ on page 324.

The perspective point remains Þxed when you use Position. For more information, see ÒPerspective Ñ Moving the Perspective PointÓ on page 340.

The Position parameter pane and the Position buttons create pretrans-formation effects. This means that if you apply a perspective to the image and then move it with Position, the foreshortening changes. To move an image without changing the foreshortening effect use the Tar-get parameters as described in ÒTarget Ñ Post-Transformation Posi-tion and ScalingÓ on page 341.

Page 336: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

336

Spline — Moving the Image Along a Smooth Path

Spline is the parameter that smooths the Position changes between key frames. It helps to reproduce the natural motion path of an object through 3D space.

Sometimes you will want objects to settle gently into place at each key frame and other times you may desire objects to move in a swooping arc, connecting the key frames. Spline helps to achieve both. It looks ahead and takes into account the motion approaching a key frame and the motion immediately after a key frame and averages the changes for the smoothest possible transition.

When you are working with Spline, it is a good idea to click the Path button in the direct manipulation tool bar. This displays the wireframe line that represents the path between key frames. It also shows how the change in the Spline settings affects the motion.

Enabling Spline automatically smooths the motion between key frames. Even when all the Spline settings are 0, the optimum smooth-ing results. Therefore, Spline is often helpful for putting the Þnishing touches on a move.

You cannot turn Spline on or off for individual key frames but you can set it to behave as though it had been turned off by changing the set-tings. You may Þnd that two key frames with no changes between them now have some slight motion when Spline is turned on. This is usually undesirable and is the main reason why you would want to change the settings to behave as if Spline had been turned off between those key frames.

Path button

Page 337: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

337

To achieve more variations to the ÒstandardÓ way Spline operates, you can adjust the Spline settings Tension, Continuity, and Bias, as described in the following sections.

Tension

Tension controls how sharply the curve bends at a key frame. The default or 0 setting is the average of the changes before and after the key frame. Decreasing it to Ð100 doubles the amount of bending from the original 0 position and creates more slack in the curve. Increasing it to 100 tightens the curve and makes the change in direction more severe.

Continuity

Continuity controls the amount of direction change between the incoming motion and outgoing motion around the key frame. Usually the motion should be as smooth as possible, reducing sharp, unnatural corners (the default setting of 0). However, when you want to simulate bouncing or punching, you must turn the Continuity down (Ð100) to make the quick, hard direction changes more obvious. Turning it up to 100 forces the motion to begin going in the opposite direction at the previous key frame, changing to the new direction for the outgoing motion.

Tens.Cont.Bias

10000

Tens.Cont.Bias

–10000

Tens.Cont.Bias

000

Page 338: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

338

Difference Between Tension and Continuity

There appears to be no difference between the motion path of an object with maximum Tension and an object with minimum Continuity. The motion dynamics of the two moves, however, are quite different. Even though both motion paths have severe direction changes, Tension causes the object to start slowly, speed up, slow down, and pause at the key frame, then speed up and slow down again at the next key frame. This is referred to as an ease in/ease out motion.

Tens.Cont.Bias

0–100

0

Tens.Cont.Bias

0100

0

Tens.Cont.Bias

000

Tens.Cont.Bias

0–100

0

Tens.Cont.Bias

10000

Continuity Tension

Page 339: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

339

Bias

Bias assigns a different weight to either the incoming or the outgoing motion. Set at 0, it averages both incoming and outgoing motion. When set to Ð100, it ÒundershootsÓ the key frame; at 100 it Òover-shootsÓ the key frame. This causes the curve to occur either before or after the key frame it passes through.

n You can use a combination of the Tens, Cont, and Bias sliders to achieve effects similar to the 2D Acceleration feature described in ÒAdjusting the AccelerationÓ on page 61.

n To move the entire curve, use the Target category as described in ÒTarget Ñ Post-Transformation Position and ScalingÓ on page 341.

Adding a New Point to a Spline Curve

If you add a key frame when using the Spline category, the Composer system displays the new point on the curve. However, it does not recalculate the curve until you use one of the Position parameters to move one of the points.

Mathematically speaking, when you add a point to a spline curve, the curve changes shape, even if the new point is on the curve. Sometimes you will want to add a new point on the curve to change the path. However, sometimes you may simply want to add a new key frame to change a parameter such as Rotation or Scaling without affecting the curve. In order to account for both cases, the Composer system uses the following rule:

Page 340: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

340

Once you move one of the points, the Composer system incorporates all of the existing key frames into the curve. You can move any of the points to readjust the curve.

Perspective — Moving the Perspective Point

Use Perspective to move the perspective point (where parallel lines appear to converge) along the screenÕs X, Y, and Z axes. This changes the way the image is visually projected onto the video screen.

X and Y move your horizontal or vertical Òpoint of view.Ó An X adjust-ment moves the projected screen image farther to the left or right. Y adjustments allow you to view the image from a higher or lower angle. Values range from Ð999 to +999, where 0 is the default.

Z moves the perspective point closer to and farther from the observer. Perspective increases as the point moves inward, and decreases as the point moves outward from the screen. Moving the perspective point in Z changes the amount of foreshortening on an image that is rotated around the X or Y axis.

Page 341: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

341

Target — Post-Transformation Position and Scaling

Use Target to change the X Y positioning and the sizing and to main-tain the current perspective.

Target is a post-transformation parameter. In other words, it is the last step of the hierarchy and affects objects after all the other parameters have affected it. If an object has been rotated and has perspective added to it, Target moves the object without changing the relationship of the other parameters. Think of it as moving the entire 3D world where point of view does not change.

Target can be used in many cases as a global parameter. If you have already created an effect and want the whole effect to move higher across the frame or to appear inside another frame, such as a television on a set, Target is the way to move it. It is also good for offsetting another track slightly if you want to use a black PICT as a drop shadow.

Page 342: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

342

The following illustrations compare the Target and Position effects:

In the above illustrations, notice the differences between the top and bottom edges of the image. The foreshortening does not change on the image moved with Target.

The following operations were performed on the image in this exam-ple before applying the Target or Position effects:

¥ The foreground image was scaled to create a Picture-In-Picture effect.

¥ The image was rotated +55 degrees around the Y axis.

¥ The image was moved with the XY position button to the bottom-left corner.

¥ A Z Perspective value of 232 was applied.

After moving with PositionBefore

After moving with TargetBefore

Page 343: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

343

The Target parameter pane contains the following parameters:

X moves the image along the screenÕs X axis (horizontally). Values range from Ð999 to +999, where 0 is the default.

Y moves the image along the screenÕs Y axis (vertically). Values range from Ð999 to +999, where 0 is the default.

Size scales the image and maintains the aspect ratio. Values range from 0 to 400, where 100 is the default scale of 100 percent.

Border

You can blend the fore-ground video with the background video if you enable borders, choose zero width, and adjust the Soft parame-ter.

Use Border to place a border around the image. Use the Fast menu to select the border style. Border style options include: Plain (the default), Metal, Bevel 1, Bevel 2, 3D Frame, and Round.

Width changes the width of the border. Values range from 0 (no bor-der) to 100, where 50 is the default.

Soft (softness) values range from 0 (hard edge) to 255 (a very soft edge), where 0 is the default. Border softness blends the border with the background image, giving the border a soft appearance.

Use the following color parameters or use the eyedropper to select a color from the video in the effect preview monitor:

H (hue) speciÞes the hue or shade of the color. Values range from 0 to 255.

Move the mouse to the Color Preview window to activate the eyedropper.

Page 344: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

344

S (saturation) speciÞes the amount or intensity of the color. Values range from 0 (no chrominance) to 255 (fully saturated color).

L (luminance) speciÞes the brightness of the color. Values range from 0 (black) to 255 (full brightness).

The default border color is black for Plain borders and shades of gray for other border types.

For a description of how to use the eyedropper, see the topic ÒAdjust-ing a Color ParameterÓ on page 51.

Highlight

The Highlight window allows you to:

¥ Enable Automatic Highlighting for Shapes and adjust the intensity of automatic highlighting

¥ Adjust the highlights for Manual Highlighting and Rev (reverse) Manual Highlighting

You can use manual highlights even when a shape is not active. The default manual highlight creates a blurred disk in the center of the image.

Soft (softness) controls the softness of the highlightÕs edge. Softness values range from 0 (hard edge) to 100 (a very soft edge), where 50 is the default.

Page 345: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

345

Inty (intensity) controls the brightness of the highlight. Values range from 0 to 100, where 50 is the default intensity.

Rad (radius) controls the size of the highlight. Values range from 0 to 100, where 50 is the default radius.

Angle rotates the highlight. This has an effect only when the aspect ratio is not zero. Values range from Ð180 degrees to +180 degrees, where 0 is the default.

Aspct (aspect ratio) changes the shape of the highlight from a perfect circle (0) to an oval or a band. Values range from Ð100 to +100, where 0 is the default. The -100 band is at right angles to the +100 band.

X moves the center of the highlight from left to right. Values range from Ð999 to +999, where 0 is the default. Positive values move the highlight to the right.

Y moves the center of the highlight from top to bottom. Values range from Ð999 to +999, where 0 is the default. Positive values move the highlight up.

Defocus — Controlling the Sharpness of Focus

Use Defocus to control the imageÕs sharpness. This gives you the abil-ity to blur the picture both horizontally and vertically in order to simu-late a cameraÕs focus.

Horz (horizontal) increases or decreases horizontal sharpness. Values range from 0 to 15, where 0 represents no change.

Vert (vertical) increases or decreases vertical sharpness. Values range from 0 to 15, where 0 represents no change.

Page 346: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

346

n When you enable Defocus, the default values are 10 for Horz and Vert. This produces a slight softening effect.

Shadow

Use Shadow to place a shadow beneath an image, adjust its offset, and adjust its transparency.

Opac (opacity) changes the shadowÕs opacity from fully transparent (0) to fully opaque (100), where 50 is the default.

X changes the shadowÕs left/right offset. Values range from Ð100 to +100, where 50 is the default.

Y changes the shadowÕs top/bottom offset. Values range from Ð100 to 0, where Ð50 is the default.

n Shadow, Trail, and Stamp (described in the following sections) are mutually exclusive. This means that you can only have one or the other enabled at a time.

Trail — Adding a Trail to a Moving Image

Use Trail to add a trail to an effect as it moves across the screen.

Decay changes the rate of the trailÕs decay, from a quick decay (close to 0) to a slower decay (close to 100), where 75 is the default.

Page 347: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

347

Use Sparkle instructs the Composer system to paint a trail with spar-kles. When Use Sparkle is not selected, the Composer system paints a trail using the image itself.

n You do not see the trail when you step through the effect because it is a cumu-lative effect. Also, you cannot render a Trail effect.

Stamp

Stamp lets you imprint a video or graphic element into an indepen-dent stamp buffer. You can Òßy onÓ multiple elements of video, text, and graphics, stamping them over the foreground image to create effects that would otherwise require rendering or additional real-time streams of video.

Three of the most common uses for Stamp are:

¥ Real-time title builds: You ßy on multiple text, graphic, and video elements and stamp them over or under the foreground image when they come to rest. Once the image is stamped, you can ßy on additional layers.

¥ Downstream key: You add an image that stays in place. For exam-ple, you could create a logo that you want to just stay on the screen.

¥ Video montage: You bring in a variety of video images, where each one stays in place as you continue to add new ones.

The illustration below shows the Stamp parameter pane.

Opac (opacity) changes the stampÕs opacity from fully transparent (0) to fully opaque (100), where 100 is the default.

Page 348: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

348

Foregnd On Top (foreground on top) switches the stamp buffer to the background; without Foregnd On Top enabled, the stamp buffer is always in the foreground.

Clear lets you clear the stamp buffer of everything in it.

n You cannot render Stamp effects; they are real-time effects. Also, the Stamp, Shadow, and Trail parameters are mutually exclusive. This means that you can only have one or the other enabled at a time.

Foregnd — Selecting Between Full, Chroma, and Luma Keys

The Foregnd (foreground) Fast menu has three choices as shown in the illustration below. Each of the three keys has different values you can adjust. When you enable a key, its value options are automatically revealed. The values are described in the sections that follow.

Full Key

Full Key is the default for all 3D effects. Use Full Key to:

¥ Create dissolves using the Opac slider

¥ Switch an effect from one video track or segment to another by using the Swap Sources button

Opac (opacity) modiÞes the transparency of the foreground image. Values range from 0 (transparent) to 100 (opaque).

Page 349: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

349

n You can also use the Level Slider to adjust the foreground opacity. See ÒLevel SliderÓ on page 320.

You cannot rotate the key independently of the image.

Invert inverts the key. This setting is most noticeable for effects that scale the foreground video, such as a Picture-In-Picture effect. The bot-tom track shows through the Picture-In-Picture key unscaled. The area outside the Picture-In-Picture is black.

Swap Sources switches the effect to the top or bottom track. For exam-ple:

¥ If you use the Scale parameter to create a 3D Picture-In-Picture effect, you can use Swap Sources to swap the image in the Picture-In-Picture.

¥ For 3D transition effects you can use this function to apply the effect to either the incoming or outgoing video tracks.

Luma Key

Use Luma Key to replace portions of the foreground video with the background video based on brightness or luminance. The Luma Key sliders allow you to select a brightness value or a range of brightness values in the foreground video. The system replaces the correspond-ing portions of the foreground video with background video.

Page 350: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

350

Opac (opacity) adjusts the transparency of the foreground image from 0 (transparent) to 100 (opaque).

Thres (threshold) identiÞes either the brightness threshold for the foreground image or the center of the luma range.

Soft (luma softness) allows you to soften the edge of the cutoff line. Pixel values slightly above or below the threshold are included depending on the softness value.

Lum Range turns the Range slider on and off.

Range slider works as follows.

¥ When Lum Range is not active, the Thres value is a cutoff point. All brightness values above the Thres value are displayed (you see the foreground). Values below the Thres value are not displayed (you see the background).

Luma Key effect

Background videoForeground video

Page 351: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

351

¥ When Lum Range is active, Thres becomes the median point of the range. This allows you to leave in a speciÞc range of brightness values as shown in the following illustration.

Invert inverts the key. Portions of the foreground that were visible are now invisible and vice versa.

Swap Sources switches the effect to the top or bottom track.

100

100

255

255

Invisible

Threshold

For

egro

und

Threshold

Thres

Visible

Invisible

Visible

When Range is not active, Thres is the cutoff point.

When Range is active, Thres is the midpoint of the range.

Softness

0

0

For

egro

und

Thres

Page 352: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

352

Chroma Key

Use Chroma Key to replace one part of the video image with another video image based on color. The key color in the video on the higher track is replaced with the video from the lower track.

Chroma keys are most frequently used with a foreground image shot in front of a highly saturated color screen as shown in the following illustrations.

Move the mouse to the Color Preview window to activate the eyedropper.

Page 353: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

353

Opac (opacity) varies the foregroundÕs opacity from fully transparent (0) to fully opaque (100), where 100 is the default.

When you use the eye-dropper, the Composer system only uses the hue from the selected color. It ignores the sat-uration and luma val-ues.

Hue identiÞes the color. The hue color is replaced with video from the lower track. Either use the slider to select the hue, or use the eyedrop-per with the Color Preview window.

H Tol (hue tolerance) controls how many similar shades of the hue will be replaced by the background (the bottom video track). Use this when the ranges of luminance and saturation of the chroma key color are too wide.

H Soft (hue softness) allows you to soften edges that are too aliased or sharp.

S Low (low saturation) allows you to remove low saturation colors by raising the lower limit. For example, sometimes portions of clothing or faces may contain subtle variations of a hue. To keep these portions of the image visible, you can try adjusting the S Low value.

Chroma Key effect

Key image - video layer 2Background - video layer 1

Page 354: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

354

S High (high saturation) allows you to remove high saturation colors by moving the upper limit down. For typical chroma keys with high saturation colors you usually leave this value at the default of 255.

Invert inverts the chroma key. Portions of the foreground that were visible are now invisible and vice versa.

Swap Sources switches the effect to the top or bottom track.

The following parameters are used only for special applications. These parameters actually create a mask rather than a key. They determine a range of values to retain rather than deÞning a range of values to key out.

Lum Range (luma range) allows you to retain values within a certain luminance range.

L Tol (low tolerance) speciÞes a tolerance level Ñ retain everything below the level.

L Soft (low softness) softens the key created by L Tol.

Using the Chroma Key Sliders

The most common procedure for using chroma key sliders is:

1. Use the eyedropper to select a hue.

For best results, pick a color that is well within the Þeld of color. For example, the following illustration shows a good area to select for the purest hue. The area near the Þgure may contain grada-tions of the desired hue. Corner areas often contain subtle shades of gray.

Page 355: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

355

2. Adjust H Tol (hue tolerance) to replace the hue with the back-ground.

3. If low saturation grays are keyed out (for example, portions of faces or clothing), try adjusting S Low (low saturation) to put them back into the foreground.

4. Use L Soft (low softness) to Þne-tune the edges of the key.

You usually keep the S High, L Tol, and L Soft at their default settings.

Background — Add a Background Color

You can achieve inter-esting effects on a two-track sequence by using a background color for the bottom track and using a Luma key on the top track.

Use Background Color to replace the bottom video track with a back-ground color.

Use the eyedropper to select a color from the video in the effect pre-view monitor, or use the following color parameters:

H (hue) identiÞes the color. Values range from 0 to 255.

Good area for eyedropper selection of hue

Not good areas for eyedropper selection of hue

Move the mouse to the Color Preview window to activate the eyedropper

Page 356: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

356

S (saturation) speciÞes the amount or intensity of the color. Values range from 0 (no chrominance) to 255 (fully saturated color).

L (luminance) speciÞes the brightness of the color. Values range from 0 (black) to 255 (full brightness).

For a description of how to use the eyedropper, see ÒAdjusting a Color ParameterÓ on page 51.

3D Effects Shapes

3D Effects shapes allow you to map the foreground video channel to various geometric shapes. You do this by selecting a shape from the Fast menu in the Shape parameter pane. The following illustration shows the Shape menu and the Þve main categories of shapes.

Page turns Splashes Ball

Offset shapes

Scaling shapes

Page 357: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

357

Shape Parameter Controls

Each shape has its own parameter pane containing controls that are speciÞc to that shape. In addition, you can use any of the other 3D Effects parameters such as Border, Scale, Position, and Trail. To experi-ment with the parameter controls, create a test sequence similar to the one in ÒCreating a Scaled Picture-in-PictureÓ on page 394.

Page Turns

A Page Turn effect treats the foreground video channel as though it were a sheet of paper being turned over or rolled up to reveal another page beneath. You can think of the paper as a clear sheet of plastic or mylar because you can see the video on either side when you rotate the image or curl the edges.

The portion of the image that folds over or rolls up is referred to as the ßap. The ßap folds over the top portion of the image.

There are three Page Turn shapes accessible from the Fast menu on the Shape Parameter pane.

Page Fold

Top

Flap

Page 358: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

358

¥ Page Turn 1 creates the illusion of the top image rolling up into a scroll. This effect has one highlight.

¥ Page Turn 2 is the same as Page Turn 1 except that there are two highlights. One highlight is slightly wider and more intense than the other.

¥ Page Fold creates an illusion similar to turning a page in a book. The top image curls over and then becomes ßat.

Page Turn Parameters

To soften the edges of a Page Turn, enable the Border parameter and adjust the Soft slider. You can soften a border of zero width.

This section describes parameters that are common to all three Page Turn effects. For example, the following illustration shows the Shape parameter pane with Page Turn 1 selected:

The following slider parameters are common to all Page Turn effects:

¥ Curl controls the amount of the rollup. It speciÞes how far the Òrolling upÓ has progressed. Values range from 0 to 100, where 0 represents no rollup. Vary the Curl value from 0 to 100 with default radius to take the page from a ßat, centered image to one that is completely off the screen.

¥ Radius controls the tightness of the curl. Values range from 0 to 100, where 15 is the default.

¥ Angle controls the direction of the fold or scroll. Values range from Ð180 degrees to +180 degrees, where 45 degrees is the default.

Page 359: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

359

In addition, there are three Fast menus: No Split, Tuck Over, and Auto Hightlight. These Fast menu values are described in the sections that follow.

Use other parameters such as Border, Scale, Position, Rotate, or Trail to enhance the effect.

Page Fold Angle Values

The following illustration shows how the Composer system interprets several angle values for the Page Fold with the default No Split option. Experiment with incremental angle values. Also experiment with changing angle values at different key frames.

While you are experimenting with angle and offset values, it is useful to scale down the top video layer. This allows you to see the full effect as the video peels off the screen. For example, scaling 75 percent in both X and Y axes displays the page fold as a Picture-In-Picture effect.

–45 degrees +45 degrees +135 degrees –135 degrees

–90 degrees 0 degrees+180 degrees–180 degrees +90 degrees

Page Fold Angles

Page 360: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

360

Splitting a Page Turn or Page Fold Effect

You can access the splitting options through the No Split Fast menu on the Shape parameter pane. A split gives the illusion of cutting the top image with a pair of scissors and folding or scrolling the resulting pieces. Splitting options include:

¥ No Split (default) folds or scrolls a single corner or edge, depend-ing on the angle.

¥ Horizontal Split cuts the image in half horizontally. The two images are tied together so that they appear to scroll or fold in uni-son. The image separates from left to right.

¥ Rev Horizontal Split (reverse horizontal split) is similar to Hori-zontal Split except that the image folds or scrolls from opposite sides at the same time.

¥ Vertical Split cuts the image in half vertically. The two images are tied together so that they appear to scroll or fold in unison. The image separates from top to bottom.

¥ Rev Vertical Split is similar to Vertical Split except that the image folds or scrolls from opposite sides at the same time.

¥ Quad Split divides the image into four equal parts. Results depend on the starting and ending angle values (specify the start-ing and ending angles on different key frames). For example, for a starting and ending angle of 135 degrees the split begins in the center and the four inside corners roll outward.

Page 361: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

361

¥ Doubled Split displays two scrolls of live video on the screen at the same time. Both scrolls roll off the video underneath.

The following illustrations show how the Horizontal Split and Rev Horizontal Split options interpret angles.

Page FoldHorizontal Split

Page FoldRev Horizontal Split

–45 degrees

+45 degrees

–135 degrees

+135 degrees

Page 362: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

362

Page FoldHorizontal Split (continued)

Page FoldRev Horizontal Split (continued)

–90 degrees(same for both)

+90 degrees(same for both)

–180 degrees+180 degrees

0 degrees

Page 363: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

363

Manipulating the Flap and Bottom of a Page Fold

You can access the tuck and ßap options through the Tuck Over Fast menu on the Shape parameter pane. Tuck and ßap options include:

¥ Tuck Over (default) folds the ßap over the top.

¥ Tuck Under folds the ßap under the top.

¥ Show Top Only shows the top without the ßap.

¥ Show Bottom Only shows the ßap (bottom) without the top.

Use Show Top Only and Show Bottom Only when you want to control the image in the ßap or top. These are commonly used with two video channels. One channel shows the top and the other shows the bottom (the ßap).

For example, if you want an opaque top and a partially transparent ßap, set a transparency value for the video channel containing Show Bottom Only. Use the Opacity value in the Foregnd parameter win-dow to adjust transparency. Note that in this example you would have to render one of these effects to see the result.

Show Top Only and Show Bottom Only are also useful when you want to apply an effect such as Defocus on just the ßap or the top.

Top

Bottom (flap)

Page 364: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

364

Highlight Options

You can access the Highlight Options through the Auto Highlight Fast menu on the Shape parameter pane. Tuck and ßap options include:

¥ Auto Highlight (default) lets the Composer system control the highlighting. It applies to all shapes except for the Ball shape. You need to enable highlighting in the Highlight parameter pane in order for highlights to appear. You can also vary the intensity of the highlight in the parameter pane. Media Composer takes care of the positioning automatically.

¥ Manual Highlight lets you use the Highlight parameter pane to control the highlighting. In this case you need to set the angle, aspect ratio, radius, etc.

Use the Highlight window (located near the bottom of the 3D Warp parameter list) to control manual highlighting. See ÒHigh-lightÓ on page 344.

¥ Rev Manual Highlight reverses the effect of manual highlighting you set up.

Manual Highlight and Rev Manual Highlight work for all shapes, including the Ball shape.

Page 365: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

365

Splashes

Splashes create a wave effect as if you dropped a stone into still water. There are two choices on the Splash Fast menu:

¥ Single Wave creates a splash with one wave, as if you dropped a pebble into a very still pool.

¥ Multi Wave creates a splash with many waves or ripples, as if you dropped a stone into a pond.

The following parameters apply to the Splash effects:

¥ Radius controls the size of the waves and therefore, the movement of the waves through the video. Values range from 0 to 100.

¥ Freq (frequency) differs for each Splash effect:

- For Single Wave, the Frequency parameter determines the width of the single wave. Reduce the Frequency value to increase the width of the wave.

- For Multi wave, Frequency controls the width and number of waves present at any given time. Increase the Frequency to increase the number of waves. Decrease the Frequency to cre-ate fewer, wider waves.

Frequency values range from 0 to 100.

Page 366: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

366

¥ Ampl (amplitude) controls the depth of the troughs of the ripples, and the height of the crests of the waves. You can think of this as the depth to which the image is distorted to produce the splash effect. Values range from 0 to 100.

The Splash shapes allow you to move the effect on the video image. The effect uses a 2D coordinate system that has its origin in the center of the image. X increases as you move to the right and Y increases as you move down.

¥ X Pos moves the splash to the right or left. The values range from Ð999 to +999, where 0 is the center of the image. Values increase to the right and decrease to the left.

¥ Y Pos moves the splash up or down. Values range from Ð999 to +999, where 0 is the center of the image. Values increase as you go down and decrease as you go up.

¥ Aspct (aspect) distorts the shape from a circle to variations on an oval shape. Values range from Ð100 to +100, where 0 is a circle.

¥ Angle rotates the splash. This parameter only has a visible effect when the aspect ratio is other than zero. Values range from Ð180 to +180.

Limitations to Splashes

The following limitations apply to Splashes:

¥ You cannot apply Z perspective to a Splash.

¥ The X and Y direct manipulation handles do not work for a Splash. Use the Rotation sliders in the Rotation parameter pane instead.

For a visual explanation of this limitation see page 4-368.

Page 367: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

367

Ball

Use Manual Highlight to apply highlights to a Ball shape.

The Ball shape lets you treat the video as a rubbery, rectangular sheet stretched around a sphere. If the radius of the sphere is very large, the corners of the sheet curve along the surface like a rubber patch on a ball. If the radius is small, the corners disappear, wrapping completely around the sphereÕs surface.

The following parameters apply to a Ball effect.

¥ Radius changes the size of the ball. Values range from 0 to 100.

¥ Curve gives the ball a 3D effect. A value of zero looks like a ßat cir-cle (and can be used as a circle wipe). Higher values give more depth to the ballÕs shape. Values range from 0 to 100.

The Ball shape allows you to move and rotate the ball. The effect uses a 2D coordinate system that has its origin in the center of the image. X increases as you move to the right and Y increases as you move down.

¥ X Pos moves the shape to the right or left in relation to the image. The values range from Ð999 to +999, where 0 is the center of the image. Values increase to the right and decrease to the left.

¥ Y Pos moves the shape up or down in relation to the image. Values range from -999 to +999, where 0 is the center of the image. Values increase as you go down and decrease as you go up.

¥ Aspct (aspect) changes the shape from perfectly round to a dis-torted shape. Values range from Ð100 to +100, where 0 is a circle.

¥ Angle rotates the axis of the shape. This effect is only visible when the aspect ratio is not zero. Values range from Ð180 to +180.

Page 368: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

368

Limitations to Ball Shapes

The following limitations apply to Ball shapes:

¥ You cannot apply Z perspective to a Ball.

¥ The X and Y direct manipulation handles do not work for a Ball. Use the Rotation sliders in the Rotation parameter pane instead.

Once you rotate a Radial effect in X or Y using the sliders, no direct manipulation other than XY position will work. To regain access to the direct manipulation Z handle, reset the X and Y rota-tion sliders to 0.

Offset Shapes

Offset shapes are separate portions of a live video image moving at the same time, in different directions, and at varying speeds. Offset shapes are shown below. You can access the Offset shapes through the Fast menu on the Shapes parameter pane.

Rotate around Z Axis Rotate around X Axis Rotate around Y Axis

Direct manipulation in Z works for Radial shapes.

Direct manipulation in X and Y does not work for Radial shapes. Use the Rotation sliders instead.

Slats Arrow One Burst Center Burst Saw Tooth Sine Wave

Bumps

Page 369: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

369

The slider parameters are common to all Offset shape effects. For example, the following illustration shows the Shape parameter pane with Slats selected.

When experimenting with these shapes, start with a Frequency value of 1 and an Amplitude of 0. This makes it eas-ier to see how changes in these values affect the image.

¥ Ampl (amplitude) controls the distance the shape moves. For tran-sition effects, increase the amplitude to take the effect off the screen.

¥ Angle changes the line along which the video pieces move. Values can range from Ð180 to +180. Use 0 for horizontal and 90 for verti-cal.

¥ Freq (frequency) controls how many copies of the offset shape appear on the screen.

¥ Offset repositions the shape on the image.

¥ Sk Am (skew amplitude) weaves the image through the slats. Think of this as weaving a Òvideo clothÓ through a loom.

¥ Sk Ang (skew angle) rotates the image through the slats.

Page 370: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

370

Slats

Slats split the image into thin parallel rectangles of separated live video. The rectangles are stacked on top of each other in tight rows. Change the Amplitude to make the slats move in opposite directions.

Arrow

You can think of Arrow as a specialized form of Slats. Each arrow con-tains seven rectangles that move at slightly different speeds. The dif-ference in speed creates the arrow shape. Use Frequency to change the

Page 371: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

371

number of arrows that appear on the screen at any given time. SeeÒOffset ShapesÓ on page 368 for a description of the other sliders.

One Burst

This is a burst in one direction. The Composer system separates the image into many straws, each with a height of one line. All straws move in the same direction but at different (random) speeds. Use Amplitude to increase the speed.

Center Burst

Page 372: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

372

This is similar to One Burst except that the burst begins in the center of the image and the straws move in opposite directions rather than in one direction. Use Amplitude to increase the speed. See ÒOffset ShapesÓ on page 368 for a description of the other sliders.

Saw Tooth

This is similar to a saw tooth wipe except that you have more control over the shape. Amplitude changes the tilt of the slats. Frequency changes the size and number of the slats. Higher values increase the number of slats.

Page 373: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

373

Sine Wave

This effect applies the image to a general sine curve, as seen on a math-ematical graph. You can also think of it as a progression of connected waves. Amplitude stretches or compacts the waves. Frequency increases the number of waves.

Bumps

You can think of this effect in terms of a sheet of video fabric tacked to an imaginary fence. The fence is made up of horizontal beams, placed at regular, parallel intervals. As the wind pushes from behind, those

Page 374: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

374

areas not held Þrmly down by the beams blow forward into rounded, uniform bumps.

¥ Amplitude stretches or compacts the bumps. Think of this as mak-ing the wind blow harder against the video fabric.

¥ Frequency increases the number of bumps (puts more beams on the fence).

¥ Change the Angle to change the line along which the video pieces move.

Scaling Shapes

The following illustration shows the Scaling shapes. They are called Scaling shapes because they give the illusion of the video ÒpouringÓ from one portion of the shape to the other. The image is scaled as it pours through a narrower or wider portion of the shape.

Scaling shapes are shown below. You can access the Scaling shapes through the Fast menu on the Shapes parameter pane.

The slider parameters are common to all Scaling shapes. For example, the following illustration shows the Shape parameter pane with Hour Glass selected.

Hour Glass Bow Tie Octagon Hexagon Rain Drop

Hour Glass 2 Hex Med Hex Wide Circle Ellipse Goblet

Page 375: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

375

Amp (amplitude) controls the width of the shape. Negative values ßip the image within the shape. Values range from Ð100 to +100.

Freq (frequency) controls how many copies of the shape appear on the screen. Values range from Ð100 to +100.

Offset moves the shape along the image from bottom to top. As one shape moves down, another shape Òpulls downÓ from above. For an example, see the illustrations on the next page. Values range from Ð100 to +100.

Skew moves the shape and the image together to the left or right. Val-ues range from Ð999 to +999, where 0 is the center of the display area.

n The interactive scaling feature is very useful when working with these effects.

Scaling shapes scroll down over the image as you increase the Offset value. The following illustrations show the progression using an Octa-gon shape. Notice how the shape moves down and the image ßows through the shape.

Page 376: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

376

1

2

4

6

5

3

Page 377: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

377

The following illustrations show examples of Scaling shapes and the values used to obtain the image shown.

Hour Glass

Bow Tie

Page 378: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

378

Octagon

Hexagon

Page 379: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

379

Rain Drop

Hour Glass 2

Page 380: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

380

Hex Medium

Hex Wide

Page 381: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

381

Circle

Ellipse

Page 382: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

382

Goblet

Page 383: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

383

CHAPTER 5

Working with 3D Effects

The best way to learn about 3D Warp parameters is to experiment with them. This chapter provides examples of some basic 3D effects, includ-ing the steps and/or values used in creating the effects. You can use them to practice creating 3D effects or you can use them to get ideas for building your own effects. Examples of both segment effects and transition effects are included.

If you need more information while you are trying to complete the examples shown here, refer to the following sources:

¥ Chapter 1, for basic information on effects editing

¥ Chapter 4, for information on the 3D interface, moving in 3D space, and descriptions of all the parameter panes and shapes

¥ The Avid Media Composer UserÕs Guide or Avid Film Composer UserÕs Guide, for basic information on using the Media Composer and Film Composer

Page 384: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

384

Some Tips for Creating These Effects

The following tips apply to the examples in this chapter:

¥ Creating the segment: Transition effects require only a two-clip sequence. Some of the segment effects require at least two tracks.

¥ Avoiding InsufÞcient Source errors: Several of these examples assume that you are creating a transition effect centered on the cut between the incoming and outgoing video. Make sure you leave enough material for the overlapping portions of the transition when you mark the source material. For example, the following illustration shows the Source monitor position bar for the outgo-ing video clip.

If you get an ÒInsufÞcient SourceÓ message when you apply the 3D Warp effect to the transition, it means you didnÕt leave enough source material behind for the system to create the transition.

¥ Using the Swap Sources button: When you use the 3D Warp effect as a transition and click on the effect for the Þrst time, the Composer system applies the effect to the incoming video. To apply the effect to the outgoing video, click the Swap Sources but-ton in the Foregnd (foreground) parameter pane. Click anywhere in the effectÕs Timeline to view the results.

Video material used for segment Material left behind fortransition to next clip

Source monitor position bar

Swap Sources button

Page 385: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

385

The following illustration shows the display for ÒCreating a Page Turn TransitionÓ on page 387, and identiÞes several areas that are referred to throughout the chapter.

The illustration below shows the various buttons you can use to manipulate an image directly in the Effect Preview monitor:

Effect icon and effect name

3D Warp parameter list Effect Preview monitor

Key frame indicators in the effect’s Timeline

3D Warp used as a transition effect Transition parameters (position and duration)

Incoming video

Outgoing video

A simple two-clip sequence

PathX Rotate

Y Rotate

XY Position

XZ Position Zoom In

Zoom OutAxis

Scale Z Rotate

Crop

Page 386: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

386

In addition to recreating the examples in this chapter, you can also experiment with the default shape effects. To use the default shapes, apply the 3D Warp effect to a clip in the Timeline, enter Effect mode, and select one of the Shapes from the Shape category. Each Shape has default values for the Þrst and last key frames. Play the effect and experiment with changing the parameter values. Some examples of shapes are provided in Chapter 4, with the values used to create them.

Applying a 3D Warp Effect as a Transition

This procedure assumes that you are familiar with adding effects to a sequence. For more information see ÒReal-Time EffectsÓ on page 26.

1. Create a sequence in the Record monitor using the standard Com-poser system editing procedures.

2. Choose Effect Palette from the Tools menu or press k-8.

3. In the Effect palette, drag the 3D Warp effect icon to the transition in the Timeline and release the mouse button. The 3D Warp effect icon appears in the Timeline as shown in the following illustra-tion.

Page 387: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

387

4. In the Timeline, move the blue position indicator to the 3D Warp effect and click the Effect Mode button.

The 3D Warp parameter list and Effect Preview monitor appear. The two default key frame indicators appear under the Effect Pre-view monitor. Now you can begin adjusting the 3D Warp parame-ters to customize your effects.

Creating a Page Turn Transition

This example uses the Page Turn 2 effect. This effect treats the fore-ground video channel as though it were a sheet of paper being rolled up to reveal another page beneath. Page Turn 2 supports two high-lights on the curl. The following illustrations show the effect created in this example.

Effect palette

Timeline

Page 388: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

388

To create the Page Turn effect

1. Create a sequence and apply the 3D Warp effect as described in the previous section.

2. In the 3D Warp parameter list, click the triangular opener for Shape, and choose Page Turn 2 from the Shape Fast menu.

The default Page Turn 2 effect appears on the incoming video. To apply the effect to the outgoing video, swap the video sources as follows:

a. Scroll down to the Foregnd category and click the triangular opener.

b. Click the Swap Sources button.

Page Turn 2, 45 degrees

Incoming videoOutgoing video

Triangularopener

Categoryname

Fast menu

Enablebutton

Page 389: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

389

c. Click anywhere in the effectÕs Timeline, and the Composer system displays the effect on the outgoing video.

3. Locate the Highlight category and click the Enable button.

4. Click the Þrst key frame indicator.

The 3D Warp parameter list for the Þrst key frame is now active.

5. In the Shape parameter pane, set the Curl slider to 0 (no curl).

6. Click the last key frame indicator.

7. Set the Curl slider to 80. This takes the curl completely off the underlying video.

8. Click the Play Effect Preview button to preview the effect.

Enable button

First key frame Last key frame

Settings for first key frame

Settings for last key frame

Page 390: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

390

n You might want to use the Transition parameters to lengthen the effect. See ÒUsing the Transition ParametersÓ on page 39 for more information.

A Simple Variation on the Page Turn Transition

This example describes how to make some simple changes to the Page Turn transition to create a dramatically different effect. To create this variation, use the example you created in the previous section.

For the previous example you used the default No Split option on the Split Fast menu. This example uses the Quad Split option.

1. Click the Þrst key frame indicator and choose Quad Split from the Split Fast menu for the Shape parameter.

2. Click the Angle slider, type 135 on the numeric keypad, and press Enter to set the Angle for the Þrst key frame to 135 degrees.

3. Click the last key frame and set the Angle to 135. The following table shows the values for each key frame.

Now step through or play the effect. The following illustrations show the effect.

Effect Parameter First Key Frame Last Key Frame

Shape Page Turn 2

Curl = 0

Radius = 15

Angle = 135

Quad Split

Curl = 80

Radius = 15

Angle = 135

Quad Split

Highlight Enabled Enabled

Page 391: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

391

Creating A Splash Dissolve

This example creates a Splash effect and uses it as a dissolve. Use the opacity slider in the Foregnd (foreground) parameter pane to create the dissolve. Changing the opacity value from solid to transparent cre-ates the same effect as a dissolve.

The following illustrations show the effect and the outgoing and incoming video.

Page Turn 2 effect Quad Split 135 degree angle

Splash dissolve

Incoming videoOutgoing video

Page 392: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

392

Here are some tips for creating this effect:

¥ Use the Multi Wave shape and increase the radius throughout the effect, starting at 0 and ending at 55.

¥ Add a new key frame (shown as the second key frame below) to provide a starting point for the dissolve. The complete dissolve occurs between the second and last key frames.

For information on working with key frames, see ÒUsing Key FramesÓ on page 59.

To create the Splash effect

1. Create a sequence with two video clips as you did in the Page Turn examples and drag the 3D Warp effect onto the Transition point in the Timeline.

2. Click the effect in the Timeline and enter Effect mode (click the Effect Mode button).

3. Choose Multi Wave from the Shape Fast menu. The Composer sys-tem displays the default Multi Wave effect on the incoming video.

4. Enable the Swap Sources button in the Foregnd parameter pane to display the effect on the outgoing video.

Now click anywhere in the effectÕs Timeline, and the Composer system displays the effect on the outgoing video.

5. Click the Þrst key frame indicator.

6. In the Shape parameter pane, set the Radius value to 0.

7. Click the last key frame indicator.

8. In the Shape parameter pane set the Radius value to 55.

First key frame Last key frameSecond key frame

Page 393: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

393

9. With the last key frame still selected, set the Opac value to 0 in the Foregnd parameter pane.

10. Add a new key frame approximately three quarters of the way through the effect.

This key frame will have a predetermined radius value (calculated by the Composer system to create a smooth splash between radius values 0 and 55). You donÕt need to change this value.

11. For the key frame you just added, set the Opac value to 100 in the Foregnd parameter pane.

12. Click the Play Effect Preview button to preview the effect.

The following table shows the nondefault key frame values for this example.

Try experimenting with the Highlight parameter for this effect. Enable Highlighting and adjust the Inty (intensity) value in the Highlight parameter pane.

EffectParameter

First Key Frame

Second Key Frame

Last Key Frame

Shape Multi Wave

Radius = 0 Let the Composer system set the Radius

Radius = 55

Foregnd Full Key

Opac = 100 Opac = 100 Opac = 0

Page 394: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

394

Creating a Scaled Picture-in-Picture

This example shows how to create a picture-in-picture sequence that you can use to experiment with different 3D Warp parameters. It is particularly useful to scale the top video image because it allows you to easily view the effects of spinning, rotating, and distorting the image. This example uses two video tracks.

1. Apply the 3D Warp effect to the top video track.

Top video track Bottom video track

Page 395: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

395

2. Click the top video segment and click the Effect Mode button to enter Effect mode.

Now you are ready to select and adjust the 3D Warp parameters.

3. If both key frame indicators are not already highlighted, press k-A or k-click one key frame to select both key frames.

Now you can change parameters for both key frames at the same time.

4. Open the Scaling parameter pane and set the scale to 75 percent in X and Y.

The easiest way to set a slider to an exact value is to click the slider, type the number on the numeric keypad, and press Enter.

5. Open the Border parameter pane.

6. Click the Enable button and use the eyedropper to choose a color from the Effect Preview monitor.

7. Click the Color Preview window to activate the eyedropper.

For a description of how to use the eyedropper, see ÒAdjusting a Color ParameterÓ on page 51.

Color Preview window

Page 396: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

396

8. Select a border style from the Fast menu and use the H, S, and L sliders to adjust the color. Adjust the width to the size you want.

9. Click the Play Effect Preview button to preview the effect.

You can modify this effect by changing the size (scaling) of the image at different key frames or by changing the position so the image moves up or down across the screen.

Using the Spline Parameters

This example shows how to use the Spline parameters to create a smooth path for moving a Picture-In-Picture effect. The example uses the Picture-In-Picture effect that you created in the previous example.

The following illustrations show the motion path editor with the Spline parameter turned on and off.

1. Enter Effect mode and click the Þrst key frame indicator (on the left side of the effectÕs Timeline).

2. Click the Path button under the Effect Preview monitor.

A dot appears in the center of the image and the arrow indicator appears to show the orientation of the image.

3. Click anywhere on the foreground video and move the image to the bottom left corner of the Effect Preview monitor.

Motion path editor with

Spline turned off Spline turned on

Motion path editor with

Page 397: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

397

4. Click the last key frame indicator and move the image for that key frame to the top right corner of the monitor. Notice that the two dots are connected by a straight line.

5. Add a key frame approximately halfway through the effectÕs Timeline.

6. Move the image for the center key frame to the top left corner of the monitor.

7. Play the effect. Notice that the image moves along straight lines.

8. Click the Enable button in the Spline parameter pane.

Notice that the straight line connecting the dots turns into a curve.

9. Play the effect again and notice the smooth movement.

Experiment with the XY Position and XZ Position buttons at any one of the key frames. Also experiment with the Rotation buttons.

n You can move the image for a key frame by Þrst clicking the dot instead of the key frame indicator.

Corner Pinning an Image

Corner pinning is a way of precisely positioning a foreground image over an image in the background video track. This example shows the background and foreground videos used to create a segment transition using corner pinning. The segment starts with an image appearing on a TV screen; the image then moves off the TV and eventually Þlls the screen.

If you want to leave the image static Ñ that is, to have it playing just on the TV screen Ñ you only need to corner pin the foreground video. However, to have the foreground image move off, as the example

Enable button

Page 398: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

398

shows, you must position it in 3D space Þrst to get the trajectory you want. Once it is positioned correctly, then you corner pin it so that it looks at Þrst as though it is playing on the TV screen.

To corner pin an image

1. Create a segment with two video tracks, placing the foreground video on the top track.

2. Apply a 3D Warp effect to the top track.

3. Enter Effect mode.

4. Scale your image if necessary.

5. Position the corners using one of the methods described in the fol-lowing sections.

6. To review your edit, click the Transition Play Loop button.

Foreground video corner pinned to background image

Foreground video moving off background image

Foreground video continuing tomove off background image

Background video Foreground video

Page 399: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

399

n To return a corner to the default position, click the corresponding corner but-ton in the parameter pane and Option-click the enable button in the Corner Pin parameter pane.

Using the Corner Pin Button

1. Click the Corner Pin button under the Effect Preview monitor to activate the handles.

2. Click and drag the handles to manipulate the image.

3. Click the Corner Pinning button a second time to turn off the han-dles.

Using the Quick Pin Feature

1. Click the Corner Pin button under the Effect Preview monitor to activate the handles.

2. Hold down the Control key, position the cursor where you want the highlighted corner to be corner pinned, and click.

The next corner is highlighted.

3. Continue using the Control key and clicking until the image is positioned where you want it.

The next corners continue to be highlighted in a clockwise rotation each time you click.

4. Click the Corner Pin button a second time to turn off the handles.

Page 400: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

400

Using the Parameter Pane

1. Click the Corner Pin enable button.

2. Use the X and Y sliders in the Corner Pin parameter pane to posi-tion the image.

The Corner Pin parameter pane has a button for each corner, let-ting you pin one corner at a time.

Creating a Stamp

In the example below, three title effects are applied sequentially on the top track, each containing one of the words. Each one has Stamp enabled on the last key frame. Enabling Stamp lets each word remain in place as the next word moves across the screen.

All three words will remain stamped in place, and you could add additional stamps until you enable Clear to clear the Stamp buffer.

Title one stamped in placeTitle two moving into position

Titles one and two stamped in placeTitle three moving into position

All three titles stamped in place

Page 401: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

401

To create a stamp

1. Create the image you want to use as a stamp.

For example, you can use the Title Tool to create a title or you could import a PICT image.

2. Create a segment with at least two video tracks.

If you want the stamp to be in the foreground, it has to be on the top track.

3. Add the track with your stamp image to the segment.

4. Enter Effect mode.

5. Click the 3D Effects button to turn on 3D effects.

6. Select the key frame where you want the stamp to occur.

If you donÕt want to use the Þrst or last key frame, add a key frame where you want the stamp to occur.

7. Click the enable button in the Stamp parameter pane.

You can enable Stamp on more than one key frame by repeating steps 6 and 7.

8. To review your edit, click the Transition Play Loop button.

To clear a stamp

1. Select the key frame where you want the stamp to be cleared.

2. Click the Clear button on the Stamp parameter pane.

Everything in the stamp buffer is cleared.

Page 402: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

402

Using Axis for a Transition

The effect created in this example uses changes to axis and rotation to create a transition. If you move the axis in Z, the point of rotation moves off the object and creates a Òbarrel rollÓ effect as if the object is inside a rolling barrel. By breaking the move into two parts, you can add another shot on the reverse side of the image.

1. Create a two-track sequence.

2. Apply the 3D Warp effect to the segment on the second track.

3. Make the effect at least Þve seconds long.

4. With both key frames selected, set Z to Ð90 in the Axis parameter pane.

5. Select the second key frame and set Y to Ð180 in the Rotation parameter pane.

6. Play the effect to see the simple YZ barrel roll.

7. Go back three seconds from the end of the effect and add a new key frame.

8. Copy the last key frame values to the new key frame.

9. Duplicate this new key frame one second later by copying and pasting so that the last three key frames are identical.

The frame stays at the half barrel roll position for three seconds.

10. Select the last key frame and set Z to 180 in the Position parameter pane.

This should bring the frame full screen for the new ending posi-tion.

11. Play the effect.

It should do a half barrel roll back, stay in position, and then move forward.

12. Find the point during the half barrel roll where the image is edge on to the viewer.

Page 403: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

403

The image should disappear and reappear with the back of the image showing.

13. Perform an Add Edit at this point.

This divides the effect in two with the correct key frames being sent to the correct parts of the clip.

14. Load the incoming video into the source monitor and mark it so that you can use it for the back of the image.

15. Step into the second part of the effect until all you see in the Time-line is the original video.

16. Mark the clip and replace it with the new shot.

17. Step out and play the effect.

Notice that the new incoming shot is reversed.

18. Step back in and apply a Flop to the incoming image.

19. Render the Flop.

20. Step out again and watch the effect.

The incoming shot correctly transitions to full screen at the end of the effect.

Turning a Splash into a Flat Image

The following techniques show two different ways to turn a Splash into a ßat image.

¥ Set the Radius value to zero. This setting conceals the ripples entirely. It allows you to create splash sequences simply by increasing the Radius.

¥ Bring Amplitude and Automatic Highlight intensity down to zero. Lowering the amplitude reduces the distortion. Reducing the highlight intensity to zero eliminates highlights and shading. This allows you to:

Page 404: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

404

- Bring up a full-sized Splash from beneath the center of the pic-ture by keeping the radius constant and increasing the Ampli-tude and Highlight intensity settings.

- Create a Splash that starts small, becomes a full-sized Splash, and then changes to a ßat picture. The following example shows how to do this.

To turn a Splash into a flat image

This example creates a splash that grows from the center of the screen. As the splash begins to cover the screen the splash slowly fades away so that the Þnal scene is completely ßat. Fade the splash by lowering the Amplitude and Highlight intensity values to 0. The following illus-trations show several stages of the effect.

1. Apply the 3D Warp effect as a segment effect as shown in the fol-lowing illustration.

2. Click the Effect Mode button to enter Effect mode.

Multi Wave Splash starts at center Splash at peak Splash slowly fades to flat

Page 405: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

405

3. Choose Multi Wave from the Shape Fast menu.

4. Set Highlight parameter values for the Þrst and last key frames by using values from the following table.

5. Create a new key frame in approximately the center of the effectÕs Timeline. This new key frame is shown as the second key frame in the following illustration.

The Composer system automatically calculates a radius size for this new key frame in order to continue the smooth transition from 0 radius to a radius of 50.

6. Set the Shape and Highlight values for the second key frame as shown in the above table.

7. Step through or play the effect.

Experiment with the X Pos and Y Pos shape parameter values to repo-sition the splash on the screen. Also experiment with the Aspct and Angle parameters to stretch and rotate the splash.

EffectParameter

First Key Frame

Second Key Frame

Last Key Frame

Shape Multi Wave

Radius = 0

Freq = 70

Ampl = 36

Let the Com-poser system set the Radius.

Freq = 70

Ampl = 36

Radius = 50

Freq = 70

Ampl = 0

Highlight Inty = 20 Inty = 20 Inty = 0

First key frame Last key frameSecond key frame

Page 406: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

406

Applying a Chroma Key

Like matte keys, chroma keys are used to replace an area of one shot with another shot. However, unlike matte keys, the area of replace-ment is determined by a single highly saturated color, usually a dis-tinctive blue or green. The foreground object, such as a person, is shot in a studio in front of a screen of the selected color. Then the back-ground is keyed out with a more desirable background, such as a weather map, an outdoor scene, or a computer-generated animation.

Chroma keys always work better when you work with component sources that have been digitized as a component signal. You can achieve this by using a component format, such as Betacam SP or D1, and a transcoder or the Avid Broadcast Video Board. Proper lighting is also crucial to separating the foreground image from the chroma key color background.

To apply a Chroma Key effect

1. Edit the foreground image onto V2 and the background image onto V1 in the Timeline.

2. Apply the 3D Warp effect to V2.

3. Choose Chroma Key from the Fast menu in the Foregnd (Fore-ground) parameter pane.

4. Click the color preview window and hold down the mouse.

5. When the eyedropper appears, drag it to the most representative area of color to be keyed and release the mouse.

When choosing a color, stay away from corners of the frame or the area immediately around the foreground because these areas may contain subtle shades of gray.

When you are Þnished, the system replaces the color with the video on V1.

Since it is often difÞcult to create a perfect key on the Þrst try, use the sliders on the Foregnd parameter pane to make value adjustments.

Page 407: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

407

APPENDIX A

Troubleshooting

This appendix contains information that you will Þnd helpful when trying to troubleshoot your Composer system.

No Title and Video Background Display

If the Title tool is unable to display the title and the video background, increase the ComposerÕs application memory allocation, as follows:

1. Quit the Composer and go to the Macintosh Finder.

2. Click the Composer application icon to select it.

3. Choose Get Info from the File menu.

4. Type larger numbers in the application Memory Requirements. The Minimum Size should be 12,000 K and the Preferred Size should be 32,000 K.

5. Click the Close box to leave the Get Info window.

6. Open the Composer application.

The next time you open the Composer application, it will use the Pre-ferred Size, if available. If it is not available, the Composer system will take as much memory as possible. If less than the Minimum Size is available, an error message appears.

Page 408: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

408

Wrong Title Format

If you see the following image in a monitor, it means that the resolu-tion of the Title effect differs from that of the video clip in the sequence. You will have to determine the resolution of the video clip. Then, you must regenerate the title at the same resolution as the video clip.

To determine the AVR of the current video clip

1. Load a sequence with the Title that has the wrong format into the Record monitor.

2. In Source/Record mode, click the Track Selector in the Timeline for the track on which the video clip appears.

3. Place the blue Position indicator on the video clip in the Timeline.

4. Hold the Option key, and click the Find Bin button below the Record monitor or in the Fast menu.

The video source clip is highlighted in the bin.

5. Select bin Text view. The video source clipÕs AVR appears in the Video column.

6. Choose Compression on the Tools menu.

Page 409: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

409

To correct a title’s AVR

1. In Source/Record mode, click the Track selector in the Timeline for the track on which the title appears.

2. Place the blue Position indicator on the title in the Timeline that has the wrong format.

3. Choose Compression from the Tools menu. The titleÕs resolution is displayed.

4. Select a resolution from the pop-up menu that matches the video clipÕs resolution in the current sequence. Click the top-left corner of the window to close the Compression tool.

5. In Source/Record mode, click the title in the Timeline that has the wrong format.

6. Choose Recreate Title Media from the Clip menu.

This recreates the title at the resolution you selected in the Com-pression tool, and saves it in the Title Effect sequence. The title is renamed <Generated Title Media>.

To change the name of a generated title

1. In Effect mode, click the Other Options button.

The Title tool opens.

2. Choose Save As on the Picture menu.

A dialog box displays.

3. Click OK.

Another dialog box displays.

4. Enter a new title name, and select a bin and target disk. Click OK.

To save the Title Effect in a bin

In Effect mode, drag the Title Effect icon to the desired bin.

Page 410: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

410

Numerics1:1.66 film mask 1911:1.85 film mask 1921:2.35 film mask 19316 x 9 film mask 1943D Effects

acceleration of 320keys 316, 348 to 352moving 324parameters 327 to 356promoting 2D effects 315real time 314shapes 356 to 382turning on and off 318with 2D and 3D versions 314

3D space, moving in 3243D Warp as transition 386

AAcceleration

of 2D effect 170of 3D effects 320of effects, adjusting 61

Add Dissolve command 40Add Edit function

and effect speed 171sub-master effects 85, 86title editing 147

Adding a spline point (3D) 339Adding highlights (3D) 344Adding shadows (3D) 346Adobe Photoshop 15Advanced JPEG compression

cropping capabilities and 164real-time effects 21, 27

Align Objects command 137Align to Frame command 138Alpha channel

media relatives 153real-time matte keys 158, 316title creation 98

Anti-aliased imagestitle elements 98

Applying 3D Warp transition 386Arrow effect (3D) 370Aspect ratio

See also Fixed aspectdefined 168grid options 57image size 53, 331, 341image size and 169title editing 155

AVR (Avid Video Resolution)

Index

A B C D E F G H I K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Page 411: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

411

3D Effects option 318recreating title media 156render settings 23

Axes, rotation (3D) 325Axis as a transition 402Axis parameter (3D) 332

BBackground color (3D) 355Ball effects (3D) 367Batch digitizing

effect resolutions 156Bias setting for Spline 339Bins

autosaving 95effect templates 18, 70, 151Text view 154title effect clips

alpha channels of 150exiting Title tool 140saving titles 153Timeline editing 145

Blend effects3D Warp 311Dip To Color 174Dissolve 175Fade From Color 176Fade To Color 177palette for 39Picture-In-Picture 178Superimpose 180

Block Spiral Matrix Wipe 289Blowup effect (Film Composer)

defined 195position and size parameters for 169

Blue dot 22, 86Borders

color selection parameters for 162on 3D effects 343

parameters for 161Bottom Box Wipe 272Bottom Centered Squeeze 256Bottom Left Corner Peel 234Bottom Left L-Conceal 221Bottom Left Squeeze 257Bottom Left to Top Right Conceal 182Bottom Left to Top Right Push 243Bottom Right Corner Peel 235Bottom Right L-Conceal 222Bottom Right Squeeze 258Bottom Right to Top Left Conceal 183Bottom Right to Top Left Push 244Bottom to Top Conceal 184Bottom to Top Peel 236Bottom to Top Push 245Bottom to Top Squeeze 259Bow Tie effect (3D) 377Box wipes

Bottom Box 272Left Box 273Lower Left Corner 274Lower Right Corner 275Right Box 276Top Box 277Upper Left Corner 278

comparable alternative to 308Upper Right Corner 279

BrightnessSee Luminance

Bring to Front command 136Bumps effect (3D) 373

CCenter Box Shape Wipe 299Center Burst effect (3D) 372Centered at Cut option 40, 173

See also Transition effectsCentered Zoom Squeeze 260

Page 412: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

412

Changing image size (3D) 331Changing perspective (3D) 340Chroma Key effect

control parameters for 165Chroma key effect 212 to 216

3D 352Chroma key effects

cropping of 53working with 406

Chrominance with Color Effect 204Circle effect (3D) 381Circle Shape Wipe 300

nested effects 78Circles

titles adding 114Clearing a stamp 401Clip

alpha channel 74edit markers 77, 146matte keys 74

Clip length and effect speed 171Clipping of color effects 203Clock Shape Wipe 302Collapsing layers, and Sub-master effects 88Color coding for real-time effects 21, 26Color effect 201 to 206Color effects

background colors 94, 99Dip To Color 174Fade From Color 176Fade to Color 177

Color gain with color effect 206Color Picker 120Color selection

adjusting 51background color (3D) 355

Color selection parameters 162Commands

Add Dissolve 40Align Objects 137Align to Frame 138

Bring to Front 136Copy 131Cut 131Delete 133Display Quality 47, 55Duplicate 132Export Picture File 142Fade Title 151Move 132New Title 96Play Effect Outline 48, 64Recreate Title Media 156Remove Effect 37, 150Render On-The-Fly 66Resize 133Safe Colors 99Select All 132Send to Back 136Set Bin Display 154Snap to Grid 101Text formatting 107Visible Grid 100

Comparison of 2D effects 308Compression Tool 156Conceal effects

See also L-ConcealsBottom Left to Top Right 182Bottom Right to Top Left 183Bottom to Top 184comparable alternative to 309Left to Right 185Right to Left 186Top Left to Bottom Right 187Top Right to Bottom Left 188Top to Bottom 189

Console commandsDisable3D 318Enable3D 318

Continuity vs Tension in motion path 338Continuity with Spline 337Controlling image sharpness (3D) 345

Page 413: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

413

Controlling speed of effects 170Coordinate system, 3D 324Copy command 131Corner Pinning

an image 398parameter (3D) 329

Creating 3D effectsAxis as a transition 402Page Turn transition 387Picture-In-Picture 394Quad Split Page Turn 390Stamp 401

Croppingparameters for 53

Cropping images (3D) 330Cropping parameters 164Custom Start option 39, 173

See also Transition effectsCut command 131

DDefocusing 3D Effects 345Delete command 133Diamond Shape Wipe 302Dip To Color effect 174Dip To Color effects

Add Dissolve button 40Disabling 3D 318Display Quality command 47, 55Dissolve effect 175

level adjustments and 171Dissolve effect (Film Composer) 196Dissolve effects 26

Add Dissolve button 40application of 38creating splash as 391duration of 39level adjustments 61

Drawing tools

circles and ovals 114lines 114 to 118squares and rectangles 114

Duplicate command 132Duration

transition effects 39DVE board

cropping capabilities and 164real-time effects 27

EEdge Wipes

Horizontal 281Horizontal Open 282Lower Left Diagonal 283Lower Right Diagonal 284nested edits 80Upper Left Diagonal 285Upper Right Diagonal 286Vertical 287Vertical Open 288

Editingmatte key 75sub-master effects 84, 85titles

by removing 150by revising 149into sequence 145over video 145recreated title media 156

track selectors 146with effects on multiple transitions 31 to 35with third-party plug-ins 35

EDL (edit decision list)sub-master effects 84

Effect Modeaspect ratio grid display in 155creating dissolves in 175key frames 151

Page 414: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

414

position indicator in 45window

accessing 45effect parameter sliders 46key frames in 46Other Options button in 46, 55, 166Reverse Effect button 172Safe Title/Action buttons in 155

Effect Palettebypassing 40displaying 16, 17dissolve effects in 39draft/best quality options in 55real-time effects in 21third-party plug-in displays 19

Effect parametersSee also each effect type and/or parameter by

nameacceleration values 61acceleration values and 170changing 50color selection and 162controlling rate of 170cropping 53, 164defined 160 to 173duration of 39enabling of 45fixed aspect and 168, 169for Blowup effects (Film Composer) 169level adjustments 60level adjustments for 171matrix effects and 166positioning 49, 51, 168, 168reversing 47, 55, 172Segment effects 26selecting 49settings 20size 53, 168transitions 26, 172width and height 53, 168width and height with fixed aspect 168

Effect Templateon 3D effects 314

Effect templateapplication of 70creating and saving 69defined 15title of 151

Effects types 159Ellipse effect (3D) 381Ellipse Shape Wipe 303Enabling 3D 319Ending at Cut option 40, 172

See also Transition effectsExport Picture File command 142Eyedropper tool

activating the 51current window 120

FFade From Color effect 176Fade Title command 151Fade To Color 177Fade(s)

Add Dissolve button 40title effects 151

Fade, film 198Fast motion 61Fast motion effect 228

See also Variable speed motion effectreversal of 229

Field parameter for Blowup effects 169Files, importing

animation formats 77graphics 74, 77PICT format 158

Film effects1:1.66 Mask 1911:1.85 Mask 1921:2.35 Mask 193

Page 415: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

415

16 x 9 Mask 194aspect ratio grid 155Blowup 169, 195Dissolve 196dissolves

Add Dissolve button 40Fade 198Mask 199masks

aspect ratio grid 57titles 155

simulation of, with solarization 206Fixed aspect

See also Position; Size of effect3D scaling parameters 3313D target parameters 341and aspect ratio 168enabling 53

Flip 207Flip Flop 207Flop 208Foreground keys (3D)

Chroma 352Full 348Luma 349

Four Corners Shape Wipe 304Frames

adjusting effects in 51compression threshold 23effect duration in 41fades in 152incoming/outgoing

level parameter 60position

transition effects 41real-time effects 156title background 95

Freeze Frame motion effect 226See also Motion effects

Full key on 3D effects 348

GGain with color effect 206Gain with key effects 165Goblet effect (3D) 382Graphics

alignment of 137drawing 114importing without alpha channel 77layering of 136matte key editing 75shadows 125titles

grid alignments 100revising 149Title tool 94

Green dot 21See also Real-time effects

Grid Matrix Wipe 290Grid values

display options 100snapping to 100See also Matrix effects

Grid values for matrix effects 166Grouping objects 134

HHeight, image 168, 169

See also Size of effectadjusting 53

Hex Medium effect (3D) 380Hex Wide effect (3D) 380Hexagon effect (3D) 378Hierarchy of parameters 327Highlighting 3D Effects 344Horizontal Bands Shape Wipe 305Horizontal Blind Shape Wipe 306Horizontal Centered Squeeze 261Horizontal Edge Wipe 281

Page 416: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

416

Horizontal Open Edge Wipe 282Horizontal Open Saw Tooth Wipe 294Horizontal position (H Pos) 168

adjusting 51Horizontal Saw Tooth Wipe 295Hour Glass 2 effect (3D) 379Hour Glass effect (3D) 377Hue, defined 163

IIcons

effect template creation 151for imported graphics 77motion effect 227Timeline displays of 24, 30title effect 95, 142, 144

Imageheight 169size with fixed aspect 169width 168

Image effectsColor 201 to 206Flip 207Flip Flop 207Flop 208Mask 209Resize 210Sub-master 211

Insufficient source errors 384Inverting color effects 203Inverting keys

Chroma 354Full 349Luma 351

KKerning of title text 110

Key effectsChroma 72, 212 to 216, 352control parameters for 165creating 72cropping of 53Full 348imported graphics 77Luma 72, 217, 349Matte 73, 219, 316reversing background and foreground 172settings for 20

Key frame parameters, 3D 321Key frames 170

accessing 46adjusting level parameter for 60button options for 48copying and pasting 63creating and selecting 60defined 59deleting 63moving or changing 62titles, fading 151, 152

LLayering objects 136Layers. See Segment effectL-Conceals

See also Conceal effectsBottom Left 221Bottom Right 222Top Left 223Top Right 224

Left Box Wipe 273Left Centered Squeeze 262Left to Right 185, 246Left to Right Peel 237Left To Right Squeeze 263Level parameter

key frames 60

Page 417: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

417

Level parameter for effects 171Lines

attribute options 115 to 118titles 114

Locking objects 135Lower Left Corner Box Wipe 274Lower Left Diagonal Edge Wipe 283Lower Right Corner Box Wipe 275Lower Right Diagonal Edge Wipe 284Luma Key effect 217

See also Key effectscontrol parameters for 165

Luma key effectscropping of 53

Luma key on 3D effects 349Luminance of color effect 202Luminance, defined 163

MMandrill DVE board

cropping capabilities and 164Mask effect (Film Composer) 191 to 194, 199Mask image effect 209Masks

effect types 26film aspect ratio 155

Matrix effectsdefining a grid for 166Other Options button 46

Matrix WipesBlock Spiral 289Grid 290One-Way Row 291Speckle 292Zig-Zag 293

Matte Key effect 219Matte key effects

alpha channel 74on 3D Effects 316

Media Filesdeleting 91insufficient source material 42managing 91titles 153

Media objectalpha channel 153precompute 153

Media Volumechoosing 58disk drives 48

Motion effectsaccessing 16Freeze Frame 226rendering requirements for 225Strobe 230Variable Speed 228

Motion path editor 323Move command 132Moving 3D images 334Moving in 3D 324Moving perspective point (3D) 340Multi Wave splashes (3D) 365Multiple layer effects

applying 31 to 35Box Wipes 271 to 279Conceals 182 to 189creating 72 to 73defined 26deleting 38Edge Wipes 280 to 288Matrix Wipes 288 to 293overlapping of 28Peels 233 to 241Picture-In-Picture 178Push 242 to 250Saw Tooth Wipes 294 to 297Shape Wipes 298 to 307Spins 250 to 253Squeezes 255 to 270Sub-master 211

Page 418: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

418

sub-master 84, 86Superimpose 180

NNesting effects

alternative techniques 81defined 78expanding effect 81 to 84recreated title media 156split screen effects 80sub-master effects 84Title within a Picture-In-Picture 79video layers 26, 78

New Title command 96Non-real-time effects

rendering of 28, 65NTSC frame rate

safe title/action guidelines 98

OObjects, graphic

See also Graphicsalignment of 137copying 131cutting 131deleting 133duplicating 132grouping and ungrouping 134layering 136locking and unlocking 135moving 132resizing 133revising 149selecting all 132shadow definition 125titles 114

Octagon effect (3D) 378

Offset shapes (3D)Arrow 370Bumps 373Center Burst 372defined 368One Burst 371Saw Tooth 372Sine Wave 373Slats 370

One Burst effect (3D) 371One-Way Row Matrix Wipe 291Opacity of Blend and Key effects 171

See also Level parameterOrange dot 21, 26

See also Real-time effectsOther Options button 46, 55, 149Ovals 114

PPage Turn

as transition 387creating quad split 390

Page Turns (3D)defined 357

PAL frame rate 98Parameters (3D)

Axis 332Border 343Corner Pinning 329Crop 330defined 327Defocus 345Foreground 348hierarchy of 327Highlight 344key frame 321Perspective 340Position 334Rotate 333

Page 419: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

419

Scaling 331Shadow 346Skew 333Spline 336 to 339Stamp 347Target 341Trail 346

Path, motion 323Peel effects

Bottom Left Corner 234Bottom Right Corner 235Bottom to Top 236Left to Right 237Right to Left 238Top Left Corner 239Top Right Corner 240

Perspective, changing (3D) 340Picture-In-Picture 178Picture-In-Picture effect

cropping of 53defined 26nested edits 79

Picture-In-Picture effects3D example 394

Pinning corners (3D) 329Play Effect Outline command 48, 64Playback of effect

See also Speed of an effectpreviewing 64real-time effect renderings 22, 27rendering requirements on 64reverse parameter and 172Sub-masters and 211titles 152

Positionfilm Blowups and X/Y values 169parameters 168, 168

Position indicatorediting an existing title 149effect deletions 36Effect Mode 46

positioning for title creation 96, 317Position of effect

adjusting 46horizontal (H Pos) 51parameters for 41vertical (V Pos) 51

Position of matrix effects 166Positioning 3D images 334Posterization of color effect 205

nested edits 78Precompute 91, 153Preview Mode

effects 46locking and unlocking objects 135viewing anti-aliased titles 98

Promoting 2D effects to 3D 315Push effects

Bottom Left to Top Right 243Bottom Right to Top Left 244Bottom to Top 245comparable alternatives to 309Left to Right 246Right to Left 247Top Left to Bottom Right 248Top Right to Bottom Left 249Top to Bottom 250

QQuad Split Page Turn, creating 390Quick Dissolve button 175

RRadial shapes See Ball, SplashesRaindrop effect (3D) 379Rate control of effect 170rate control parameters for 170Rate control of effect

Page 420: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

420

See also Acceleration of effect; Level parameter for effects

Real-time effecttitles

changing to real-time titles 156Real-time effects

color coding for 21combined with rendered effects 65cropping of 53defined 26overlapping of 27 to 29, 65 to 66rendering of 65settings options 20, 22sub-masters 85, 86third-party plug-ins 69titles and rendering 27user setting requirements for 20

Recreate Title Media command 156Rectangle in titles 114Relative position parameters

accessing 49dissolves 40for transition effects 172

Remove Effect command 37, 150Render On-The_Fly command 66Rendering of effects

bin displays 154color coding 22, 86matte key graphics 76non-real-time effects 65procedure for multiple effects 68real-time effects

overlapping/combining parameters 66playback requirements 22precompute 65titles 27, 157

settings options 20, 22sub-masters 85, 86sub-masters and 211third-party plug-ins 69

Resize command 133

Resize effect 210Reversal of effect parameter 47, 55Reversing effects 172Reversing motion effects 229Right Box Wipe 276Right Centered Squeeze 264Right to Left Conceal 186Right to Left Peel 238Right to Left Push 247Right to Left Squeeze 265Rotation (3D)

axes (3D) 325moving axis of 332of effects 333

SSafe Action Area

defined 98displaying 47displaying Aspect Ratio Grid 155

Safe Colors command 99Safe Title Area

align objects 138defined 98displaying 47displaying Aspect Ratio Grid 155visual guidelines for 56

Saturation of color effecttitles 99

Saturation, defined 163Saw Tooth effects (3D) 372Saw Tooth Wipes

Horizontal 295Horizontal Open 294Vertical 297Vertical Open 296

Scaling parameter (3D) 331Scaling shapes

Goblet 382

Page 421: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

421

Scaling shapes (3D)Bow Tie 377Circle 381defined 374Ellipse 381Hex Medium 380Hex Wide 380Hexagon 378Hour Glass 377Hour Glass 2 379Octagon effect 378Raindrop 379

Segment effectSee also Multiple layer effects; Video layersConceals 182 to 189deletion of 36, 38film 191 to 194multiple layer

Box Wipes 271 to 279chroma key 352Conceal effects 182 to 189Edge Wipes 280 to 288key effects 212 to 216, ?? to 219L-Conceal effects 221 to 224luma key 349Matrix Wipes 288 to 293matte key effects 316Peels 233 to 241Picture-In-Picture 178Push 242 to 250Saw Tooth Wipes 294 to 297Shape Wipes 298 to 307Superimpose 180

multiple layer effectscreating 31 to 35defined 26sub-masters 84, 86

single layerColor Effect 201Conceal effects 182 to 189Film Blowup 195

Film Masks 191 to 194, 199Flip 207Flip Flop 207Flop 208Mask effect 209Resize 210

single layer effectsdefined 26

Spins 250 to 253Squeezes 255 to 270Sub-master 211title editing 147 to 151types of 26

Segment effects 26Select All command 132Selection Tool

defined 104for grouping/ungrouping objects 134text options for titles 108

Send to Back command 136Sequence

deleting segments of 36real-time effects in 27, 29third-party plug-ins 35title editing 100, 145

Set Bin Display command 154Shadows

graphics 125on 3D Effects 346

Shape WipesCenter Box 299Circle 300Clock 302Diamond 302Ellipse 303Four Corners 304Horizontal Bands 305Horizontal Blind 306Vertical Blind 307

Shapes (3D)about 356

Page 422: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

422

Ball 367Offset 368 to 373Page Turns 357 to 364Scaling 374 to 382

Ellipse 381Splashes 365

Sharpness of focus, controlling (3D) 345Sine Wave effect (3D) 373Single layer segment effects

See also Multiple layer effects; Segment effectConceals 182 to 189defined 26Image effects 201 to 211

Single Wave splashes (3D) 365Size of effect

adjusting 53film Blowup parameters 169fixed aspect 331fixed aspect and 169parameters for 168real-time titles 156source media 42

Size, of effectadjusting 331, 341fixed aspect and 343

Sizing an image (3D) 331Skewing 3D effects 333Slats effect (3D) 370Slow motion

acceleration 61Slow motion effect 228

See also Variable speed motion effectSlow motion effect, reversal of 229Smoothing a path (3D) 336Snap to Grid command 101Softness parameter

for borders 161key effects and 166

Solarization of color effect 206Source/Record Mode

aspect ratio grid display in 155

creating dissolves in 175duration setting 173

Speckle Matrix Wipe 292Speed of an effect

acceleration 61video underruns 66

Speed of effects 171See also Acceleration

Spin effectsX Spin 251Y Spin 252Z Spin 253

Splashcreating dissolve 391making a flat image 404

Splashes (3D) 365Spline parameter (3D)

adding a point 339Bias setting 339Continuity setting 337defined 336Tension setting 337using 396

Split Screen effects 80Squares

titles 114Squeeze effects

Bottom Centered 256Bottom Left 257Bottom Right 258Bottom to Top 259Centered Zoom 260Horizontal Centered 261Left Centered 262Left to Right 263Right Centered 264Right to Left 265Top Centered 266Top Left 267

comparable alternatives to 309Top Right 268

Page 423: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

423

Top to Bottom 269Vertical Centered 270

Stamp (3D)clearing 401creating 401

Stamping a 3D effect 347Starting at Cut option 39, 173

See also Transition effectsStrobe motion effect 230

See also Motion effectsStyle of Color effect 205Sub-master editing 84, 86Sub-master image effect 211Superimpose 180Superimpose effects

in titles 94Swapping effect tracks 349Swapping incoming/outgoing (3D) 384

TTarget on 3D effects 341Tension setting for Spline (3D) 337Tension vs Continuity in motion path 338Text for titles

aligning 137kerning 110layering of 136leading 112repositioning of 106revising 149shadow options for 125

Text formatting commands 107Third-party plug-ins

applying to a sequence 35compatibility of 160installing 19Other Options button 46

Tilting 3D effects 333Timeline

effect icons 24, 30, 86real-time effects, color coding 21, 26, 86segment deletions 36segment editing

titles 145, 146, 150settings for 24title development 95

Titlecolor of background 94, 99complexity of 157creating new 3D 317editing a 145 to 148fading a 151nested edits 79overlapping of 158promoting to 3D 317real-time 156removing 150revising 149

Title effectalpha channel 150, 153exiting Title tool 140media file relatives of 153saving 141, 143Timeline editing 145

Title toolaccessing 16background options 99creating a new title with 95 to 96creating multiple titles 95defined 94exiting 143, 143Other Options button 46revising a title with 149save options 143window 97

Top Box Wipe 277Top Centered Squeeze 266Top Left Corner Peel 239Top Left L-Conceal 223Top Left Squeeze 267

Page 424: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

424

Top Left to Bottom Right 187Top Left to Bottom Right Push 248Top Right Corner Peel 240Top Right L-Conceal 224Top Right Squeeze 268Top Right to Bottom Left Conceal 188Top Right to Bottom Left Push 249Top to Bottom Conceal 189Top to Bottom Push 250Top to Bottom Squeeze 269Track(s)

videoswapping effects on (3D) 349

Tracksaudio title, editing 146video

adding new 145nested edits 78real-time effects on

overlapping of 27, 28sub-master effects 86titles 94, 145

Trails on 3D effects 346Transition effects

applying 3D Warp as 386Blends 174 to 180Box Wipes 271 to 279Conceals 182 to 189creating Page Turn 387customizing 44defined 26deleting 36dissolves 38Edge Wipes 280 to 288fades 176, 177Film

Dissolve 196Fade 198

keys 212 to 217L-Conceals 221 to 224Matrix Wipes 288 to 293

Peels 233 to 241positioning defined 172Push 242 to 250reverse parameter for 172Saw Tooth 294 to 297Shape Wipes 298 to 307Spins 250 to 253Squeezes 255 to 270trimming 43using Axis for 402

Transparency of an effectadjusting 60

Transparency of Blend and Key effects 171See also Level parameter

Trim Modecreating dissolves in 175effect parameters in 172settings for 25transition effects in 43

Turning 3D on and off 318Two channel effects

See Blend effectsTypes of effects 159

UUngrouping objects 135Unlocking objects 135Update rate of Strobe effect 231Upgrading 2D effects to 3D 315Upper Left Corner Box Wipe 278Upper Light Diagonal Edge Wipe 285Upper Right Corner Box Wipe 279Upper Right Diagonal Edge Wipe 286User Settings 20

VVariable speed motion effect 228

Page 425: Media Composer and Film Composer Effects Guideresources.avid.com/SupportFiles/attach/Effects.pdfv Locating and Deleting Effect Media Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter

425

See also Motion effectsVertical Blind Shape Wipe 307Vertical Centered Squeeze 270Vertical Edge Wipe 287Vertical Open Edge Wipe 288Vertical Open Saw Tooth Wipe 296Vertical position (V Pos) 168

adjusting 51Vertical Saw Tooth Wipe 297Video

nested edits 78Video layer

foreground (3D)keys on 348 to 355

Video layer(s)incoming/outgoing

swapping (3D) 384Video layers

backgroundTitle tool 99

gain levels 165nested effects 26, 78reversing 172sub-master effects 85, 86titles 94 to 99, 158

Video mixdown 89Video Underrun error messages 66Visible Grid command 100

WWidth, image 168, 168

See also Size of effectadjusting 53

Wipe effectsBox Wipes 271 to 279Edge Wipes 280 to 288level parameter values and 171Matrix Wipes 288 to 293nested edits 80

Saw Tooth Wipes 294 to 297settings for 20Shape Wipes 298 to 307

XX Position for film Blowup effects 169X Spin 251X, Y, Z coordinate system 324

YY Position for film Blowup effects 170Y Spin effect 252

ZZ Spin effect 253Zig-Zag Matrix Wipe 293Zoom effect 260Zooming in or out of effect monitor 323